UC-NRLF 
 
 557 
 
 ! 
 
 ! ill 
 
 llli.1 i 
 
J Henry Senger 
 
A HANDBOOK OF 
 
 GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 BY 
 FRANK ADOLPH BERNSTORFF, PH.D. 
 
 INSTRUCTOR IN GERMAN IN NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY 
 
 GINN AND COMPANY 
 
 BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON 
 
IN MEMORIAM 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1912 
 BY FRANK A. BERNSTORFF 
 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
 912.10 
 
 gftc fltftenaeum Bre 
 
 GINN AND COMPANY PRO- 
 PRIETORS BOSTON U.S.A. , 
 
PREFACE 
 
 This handbook, as the name implies, contains only the essentials 
 of German grammar. It is a drill book and is intended primarily 
 for review work in second-year classes. It may, however, be used 
 very successfully as a first-year book. 
 
 The subject matter has been arranged topically, and not in the 
 form of lessons. For reviews and for convenience of reference this 
 plan should prove most serviceable. Abundant examples are given 
 in the text to illustrate the various points of grammar, and, in addi- 
 tion, English exercises to be translated into German are given in 
 the back part of the book. The list of nouns given under sections 
 322-339, will, it is hoped, help to simplify vowel mutation and the 
 declension of nouns. 
 
 The Appendix contains a new treatment of the declension of 
 nouns, which may appeal to many teachers as a simple and practical 
 way of presenting this rather difficult subject. 
 
 The author is under especial obligation to the publishers for 
 many valuable criticisms, to his wife Lilian Bergold Bernstorff for 
 helpful suggestions, to Professor Chester Nathan Gould of The 
 University of Chicago for a careful reading of the manuscript, and 
 to Professor George O. Curme of Northwestern University for 
 
 scholarly suggestions and advice. 
 
 F. A. B. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PRONUNCIATION i 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES 6 
 
 CAPITALS . 7 
 
 THE ARTICLES 8 
 
 THE NOUN 10 
 
 Strong declension and vowel mutation 10 
 
 Weak declension . . 15 
 
 Mixed declension 16 
 
 Peculiarities of nouns 17 
 
 Differentiation of certain nouns 19 
 
 Proper nouns 21 
 
 Gender of nouns 22 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE : DECLENSION AND COMPARISON 24 
 
 THE ADVERB 33 
 
 THE NUMERALS 35 
 
 THE PRONOUN 36 
 
 Personal 36 
 
 Reflexive 38 
 
 Possessive 39 
 
 Interrogative 41 
 
 Relative 42 
 
 Demonstrative 44 
 
 Indefinite 46 
 
 THE PREPOSITION 47 
 
 THE CONJUNCTION . 51 
 
 THE INTERJECTION 54 
 
 V 
 
vi HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 PAGE 
 
 THE VERB 55 
 
 Auxiliary verbs of tense 55 
 
 Weak verbs 55 
 
 Irregular weak verbs 67 
 
 Strong verbs 67 
 
 Separable and inseparable verbs 70 
 
 Reflexive verbs . 72 
 
 Passive voice 74 
 
 Modal auxiliary verbs 77 
 
 Impersonal verbs 80 
 
 Subjunctive mood 81 
 
 THE ORDER OF WORDS 87 
 
 VOWEL GRADATION 93 
 
 LIST OF STRONG VERBS 95 
 
 DIFFERENTIATION OF CERTAIN VERBS 101 
 
 LISTS OF STRONG NOUNS 103 
 
 APPENDIX in 
 
 EXERCISES 119 
 
 VOCABULARIES 133 
 
 INDEX . ... 153 
 
HANDBOOK OF GERMAN 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 PRONUNCIATION 
 1. The alphabet. 
 
 GERMAN GERMAN ROMAN GERMAN ROMAN 
 
 FORM NAME FORM SCRIPT SCRIPT 
 
 9( 
 
 a 
 
 a (ah) 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 b 
 
 be (bay) 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 e 
 
 c 
 
 ce (tsay) 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 & 
 
 b 
 
 de (day) 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 @ 
 
 e 
 
 e(ay) 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 g 
 
 f 
 
 ef (eff) 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 ge (gay) 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 f) 
 
 ha (hah) 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 i(ee) 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 jot (yot) 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 / 
 
 J8 I ka (kah) K k 
 
HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 GERMAN 
 
 FORM 
 
 GERMAN 
 
 NAME 
 
 ROMAN GERMAN ROMAN 
 FORM SCRIPT SCRIPT 
 
 S I 
 
 el (el)- | 
 
 LI ^ S ? * 
 
 >J?m/ 
 
 em (em) 
 
 M m ^ _ C^/C t 
 
 9? n 
 
 en (en) 
 
 N n ^ _ $ * 
 
 D o 
 
 o (oh) 
 
 Oo # , ^ ^ 
 
 SP P 
 
 pe (pay) 
 
 P p <&f & / 
 
 Q q 
 
 ku (koo) 
 
 Qq f 7 @ } 
 
 9J r 
 
 r (err as in error) 
 
 R r ^ C^ ^ 
 
 ewa 
 
 es (ess) 
 
 s s ^y> ^ ^ 
 
 6 
 
 es-zet (ess-tset') 
 
 SZ 6 x^ * 
 
 s t 
 
 te (tay) 
 
 T t i/ 4<r (^x ^ 
 
 U u 
 
 u (oo) 
 
 U u <W J^ $$ i 
 
 
 
 vau (fow) 
 
 Vv ^^^ ^ , 
 
 28 n> 
 
 w (vay) 
 
 Ww ^? ^ @f. * 
 
 s s. 
 
 ix(ix) 
 
 x* e&g @$ * 
 
 8 *) 
 
 ypsilon (ipsilon) 
 
 Yy #2 ^ $M n 
 , *f ^ ^ ^ 
 
 3 s 
 
 zet (tset) 
 
 z z <2 @ * 
 
 ^ z ^ ? ^ t 
 
PRONUNCIATION 3 
 
 2. Mutated vowels. 31, a ; ), o ; U, it ; $tu, du ; aa and oo be- 
 come d and o. 
 
 3. Diphthongs. 2tt, at ; @t, ei ; 3lu, au ; 6u, eu ; 2Iu, du. 
 
 4. Consonant combinations. gfy, d) ; dt ; $E), pf) ; f), tf) ; ; 
 
 *,W; fc< 
 
 5. The use of ff, jj, f , and 3, To express ss in German use jj 
 only between two short vowels, otherwise always use fy. When one 
 s occurs in a word it is expressed by the round s (g) only at the 
 end of a word or syllable ; in all other positions long s (f) is used. 
 
 6. Pronunciation of vowels. A vowel is short when followed by 
 two or more consonants other than inflectional endings : lafjen, 
 fprecfyen, fyoffen. 
 
 7. A vowel is long (i) when doubled: ba ^3aar; (2) when 
 followed by a consonant, or by I) plus a consonant, in an accented 
 syllable : lefert, 33reel, fefylen ; (3) when followed by more than 
 one consonant, provided the consonant (or consonants) after the 
 first is an inflectional ending : lobft, lobt, Xag3 ; and (4) sometimes 
 when followed by rf) or ft : fucfyen, Sud), Dftern. 
 
 NOTE. The vowel t is long when followed by c : fcteten, Sieb. 
 
 8. Simple vowel sounds (11, note). 
 
 LONG ENGLISH GERMAN SHORT ENGLISH GERMAN 
 
 a = a in father-. SSater a (see note) : al3 
 
 C a in late : fefyr C = e mpen : benn 
 
 .. film e = ^ mso/a: lobe 
 
 =t in machine'. ( ' (finan 
 
 Ipe i = /in//: ift 
 
 = <? in &?///: Tt)0^l P (see note) : fyoffen 
 
 U = ^ in boot : gut It = u in /// : butrf) 
 
 ft has no equivalent : 33 diet ft = * in w<?/ : ()(itte 
 
 iJ has no equivalent: fybren ii has no equivalent: offnen 
 
 ii has no equivalent: iiber jyj^ ii has no equivalent: mujjen 
 
 NOTE. In German short a has the same sound as long a, but is pro- 
 nounced more quickly. Short o is between the English o of note and the 
 o Qinot\ examples: nodj, foften, fyoffen. 
 
4 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 9. Diphthongs. 
 
 rti = ai in aisle : 5Rai ftU = ou in house : 
 
 ei = in height : fei lit = we: pf ui 
 
 flu = ^ in ^7 : Stiume 
 
 eu = tfy in boy : treu 
 
 10. Pronunciation of consonants. 
 
 ft initial = English b : Slid), bitten. 
 
 6 final or followed by a consonant =/ : 2ob, lobt. 
 
 C before a, o, u, or a consonant = k : Gonto, Grebit. 
 
 c before e, i, t), d, b = ts : Gent, Gtfterne, Gcifar. 
 
 d) after e or i : (i) Prolong the pronunciation of English long e\ 
 
 (2) let the e-sound disappear abruptly ; (3) continue the stream 
 
 of breath forcibly : id), mid), ed)t. 
 
 d) after a, o, u, has a rough guttural sound : ad), bod), fud^en. 
 d) in words of French origin = sh : Gfyef, Gfyarabe. 
 (Jj in most words of Greek origin = k : Gfyloroform. 
 d)$ when 3 belongs to the stem = ks : J>ad)3, roadmen. 
 b initial = d\ ber ieb. 
 b final = /: unb. 
 
 b before another consonant = /: rebltd). 
 f =/: fiir, ttef . 
 g initial =g hard : eneral, geben. 
 
 r. , f ch in North German V' * cm ^ 
 q final = -{ >: Xag, 2Beg, ^rteg. 
 
 L k in South German J 
 
 g before e in French derivatives = z in azure : ^5age, ente. 
 
 gtt in French derivatives = ny : G^ampagner. 
 
 ^ at the beginning of a syllable = h : anb, 2Bet^ett (13). 
 
 | = y : ja, jetjt. Capital ^5 before a vowel is a consonant ; before a 
 
 consonant it is a vowel : IJalob, $faaf . 
 t in French derivatives = z in azure \ te \ 
 
 I = /, but German I has a clearer sound than English /: loben. 
 ttt, n, )J = m> n,p : mein, nun, 
 
PRONUNCIATION 5 
 
 ttg = ng in singer-. (Stinger, finger. 
 
 qil = kv nearly : Quefle. 
 
 t in stage pronunciation = r lingual. 
 
 t in conversation = r guttural. 
 
 f when final = ss; in all other positions \ = z\ nwS, bag, but lefen, 
 
 fef)en. (See ft below.) 
 frfjtt) = shv nearly : fdfjroarg, fcfyroetgen. 
 fp initial = shp : fptit, fpredfjen. 
 ft initial = sht \ ftefyen, tufyl. 
 ft final = English st\ fjaft, ift, ^Haft. 
 t = /, but before i plus another vowel, in terminations, it = ts : 
 
 Nation, patient. 
 t(j t : X^eater. 
 to =f: SSater. In foreign words to initial or medial = v\ 3Senu. 
 
 j x : er.e, Senien. 
 
 ^ = u long or short : 35lt)t^ologie, SD^prte. 
 
 8 = #: gu, Sett. 
 
 11. Efercise in pronunciation. 
 
 S3ud) anb ^nabe patient 
 
 ab lobt rebltd^ al Sweater je^t 
 
 6onto eneral S^9er oetfye rufen 
 
 Sent 2ag 2Beg DueHe 2lt^let 3Keer 
 
 (Stifar ^onig nw 3Sater raad^fen 
 
 id^ mid^ Courage fe^en 3Senu fie 
 
 ad^ bodjj S^ampagner lefen raenn fei 
 
 6fyef ^o^cinn fpred^en SKpt^ologte ^offen 
 
 Gfyrift Sf aa ^ ftc^cn gu je^n SKonwnent 
 
 journal Nation Sett raerben 
 
 NOTE. The sound of but very few German letters may be said to have 
 an exact equivalent in English. Paragraphs 8, 9, and 10, therefore, are only 
 approximately correct. Good pronunciation can be learned only by hearing 
 each sound pronounced correctly. 
 
6 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 12. Accent. German words as a rule are accented on the first 
 syllable. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS, i . The inseparable prefixes (250) : nerfteljen. 
 
 2. Many words of foreign origin: lafteten, Iurio3, relatin, Nation, 
 etubent, Snbianer, $bee, flartoffel, glaneil, papier, aftufil, goift, 3?atur. 
 
 3. Many words with foreign suffixes: fto^ieren, lantonal, )rutferei. 
 
 4. Many compound adverbs : tyercwf, baoon, roomit, metteidjt, t>orbei. 
 
 5. A few special words: lebenbig, Spohmber, gorelle, usually luttyerifdjj. 
 
 13. There are no silent letters in German except I) and e. The 
 former is silent only in a medial or final position : f efyen, fafy ; the 
 latter in most words of native German origin : bieten, Siebe. 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES 
 
 14. In pronunciation. A single consonant is pronounced with 
 the following vowel : lo-ben, ru=fen, SBeisjen ; also the digraph cf) 
 after a long vowel : fu=rf)en 
 
 15. Double consonants and the digraphs dj (after a short vowel) 
 and ng are divided equally between the two vowels : lafjen, fyoffen, 
 foUen, fennen, lad^en, fangen, badten (dt = kk). 
 
 16. If two or more consonants, except the digraphs d) and ng 
 (14, 15), stand between two vowels, the last one goes with the 
 following vowel. After a consonant or a long vowel ft goes with 
 the following vowel. Examples : fyel=fen, $arp=fen, txwd)=fen, fedHen, 
 raf=ten, but fu^en, ber=ften, fyu-ften, tauten (from tafen). Similarly 
 2, ^ (= ks, ts) : eje, i^e, pronounced ef -fe, it-fe. 
 
 17. Compound words are divided according to their component 
 parts: wn=arbetten, blut=arm, ent=el)ren, 2)onner3'tag. Exceptions 
 are bar, war, fyer, ^in before a vowel : ba-riiber, tt)a=rum, ^ 
 
 18. At the end of a line. A single consonant is written with the 
 following vowel: Io=ben, ru=fen, tre^ten, 6e=gel, 2)ie=ner. The con- 
 sonant combinations fi, <$, f$, p, ft, and tl) are never separated and 
 follow the above rule : fii-d)ett, lau-fd)en, $fyi=Io=fO'pfyie, la=tt)0'lifd^. 
 
CAPITALS 7 
 
 19. Of two or more consonants, except the above-mentioned 
 consonant combinations (18), the last one goes with the following 
 vowel : fyel-fen, top-fen, Irat^en. 
 
 20. The combination tf becomes ff and the last f goes with the 
 following vowel: acfe becomes al=fe. 
 
 21. In foreign words combinations of b, p, b, t, g, and I with 
 I or t generally go with the following vowel : ^U'b 
 
 22. Compound words are separated according to their com- 
 ponent parts, but each part of a compound is separated into 
 syllables the same as if standing alone : ent=ef)ren, fyerniber. 
 
 CAPITALS 
 
 23. With an initial capital are written : 
 
 1. All nouns : 33ud), $<xrl. 
 
 2. All words used as nouns : ber ute, bet efcmbte, bag Soben. 
 
 3. The pronoun (5ie, you. 
 
 4. The possessive pronoun ^fyrer, ^fyt, %*%, yours. 
 
 5. The possessive adjective $f)r, 3$te ^t, your. 
 
 6. In letters the pronouns bu and ifyr, and their possessives betn 
 and euet, when they refer to the person or persons to whom the 
 letter is* addressed. 
 
 7. Proper adjectives in er formed from names of cities or coun- 
 tries : ber Joiner SDom, nadfj @d^tt)eier 2lrt. 
 
 8. Proper adjectives referring to persons : bd Sufffdje au3. 
 
 24. With a small initial are written : 
 
 1. The pronoun /: id). 
 
 2. The reflexive fid) even in polite address : freuen <5te fid). 
 
 3. Proper adjectives not referring to persons : ba beutfdje 
 
 NOTE. There is a slight tendency at present not to adhere strictly to 
 the rule of beginning every German noun with a capital. This is especially 
 true of scientific works. 
 
8 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 THE ARTICLES 
 
 25. The definite article is declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 M. F. N. M. F. N. 
 
 NOM. bet bte bag, the bte, the 
 
 GEN. beg bet beg, of the bet, of the 
 
 DAT. bent ber bem, to or for the ben, to or for the 
 
 Ace. ben bte bag, the bte, the 
 
 NOTE. For the declension of biefer see 91. 
 
 26. The definite article, as a rule, is not omitted before nouns 
 in German. 
 
 27. The definite article is used before a noun when it denotes 
 all or a definite part of its class. If only an indefinite part is 
 referred to, the article is omitted. 
 
 3>ie 9JMW& tft billiger alg ber 2Betn. 
 Milk is cheaper than -wine. 
 
 S)ie 3Kild) in btefem lag tft fauer. 
 The milk in this glass is sour. 
 
 %$ trinlc lieber 3JWd& ate flaffee. 
 / like milk better than coffee. 
 
 28. The definite article is used instead of the possessive ad- 
 jective when the possessive relation is so evident that it cannot 
 be mistaken. 
 
 aft bu ben SSater gefefyen ? 
 Have you seen my father'} 
 
 6r ftecfte bte anb in bie'3fofd)e. 
 He put his hand into his pocket. 
 
 29. The definite article is used before abstract nouns, names of 
 the seasons, months, days of the week, streets, proper names when 
 preceded by an adjective, feminine names of countries, and the 
 neuters bag (SIfajs and bag 
 
THE ARTICLES 9 
 
 2)ie Unfcfyulb fyat einen $reunb im immel, innocence has a friend 
 
 in heaven. 
 2)er $rul)ling ift bie jcfyonfte $eit be Qa^reS, spring is the most 
 
 beautiful time of the year. 
 
 er 6onntag ift em Sftufyetag, Sunday is a day of rest. 
 3d) roofyne in bet SBefyrenftra^e, I live in Behren Street. 
 5Der !leine eorg ift gefaflen, little George has fallen. 
 
 NOTE. The article is omitted before names of months and days of the 
 week when used adverbially, except after the prepositions an and in : feit 
 Suni E)at e3 nitf)t geregnet, it hasn't rained since June ; er ift feit 3JUmtag 
 franf, he has been sick since Monday ; but am onntag, on Sunday, im 
 3itni, in June. 
 
 30. The indefinite article tin, a, an, and feitt, not a, no (adj.), are 
 declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 M. F. N. M. F. N. M. F. N. 
 
 NOM. ein eine ein fein teine fein !eine 
 
 GEN. eineS einer eine feineS leiner feine fetner 
 
 DAT. einem einer einem feinem leiner leinem feinen 
 
 Ace. einen eine ein feinen leine fein feine 
 
 NOTE. The word fein is a negative article. 
 
 31. The indefinite article is generally omitted before a predicate 
 noun used in a general sense, designating a whole class of objects 
 or beings. It is always omitted after al3. 
 
 @r ift 2lrt. 
 
 He is a physician. 
 
 @r ift al8 elefyrter fefyr beru^mt. 
 He is very famous as a scholar. 
 
 32. The possessive adjectives mein, my, bein, thy, your; fein, 
 his; ifyr, her; jein, its; unfer, our; euer, your; ifyr, their; gfyr, 
 your, are declined like fein. When used without a noun they are 
 possessive pronouns (136). 
 
10 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 THE NOUN 
 
 33. Declension of nouns. There are three noun declensions : the 
 strong, the weak, and the mixed. 
 
 34. The declension, vowel mutation, and gender of nouns can 
 best be learned by constant drill in giving their principal parts. 
 These are the nominative and genitive singular and the nominative 
 plural. In learning these forms the definite article must always 
 accompany the noun. Examples : nom. sing, ber Xag, gen. sing. 
 beg Xageg, nom. pi. bie Sage ; nom. sing, bag aug, gen. sing, beg 
 aufeg, nom. pi. bie aufer. 
 
 35. Table of endings. 
 
 DECLENSION N. SING. G. SING. N. PLURAL VOWEL MUTATION 
 
 Strong (41) 
 
 Class I -g Sometimes 
 
 T Masc. monosyllables often 
 Class II -g or -eg -e J Fem - monosyllables always 
 
 Class III -g or -eg -er Always 
 
 Weak -n or -en -n or -en Never 
 
 Mixed -g or -eg -n or -en Never 
 
 36. All nouns end in n in the dative plural. 
 
 37. Feminine nouns do not change their form in the singular. 
 
 38. All feminine nouns except SJlutter and Sodjter belong either 
 to the second class strong or to the weak declension. 
 
 39. Only strong nouns have vowel mutation. 
 
 40. The last member of a compound noun determines its gender 
 and declension : bag aug, ber cfyliifjel, ber aitgfrf)luffel. 
 
 41. The strong declension. The strong declension has three 
 classes. They are distinguished from each other by the nominative 
 plural. The first class does not take an inflectional ending in the 
 nominative plural ; the second class adds e, and the third et * 
 
THE NOUN II 
 
 EXAMPLES : NOMINATIVE GENITIVE PLURAL 
 
 First Class ber paten beg patens bie paten 
 
 Second Class ber Sag beg ageg bie Sage 
 
 Third Class bag aug beg fraufeg bie >aufer 
 
 42. The ending eg of the genitive singular is usually confined 
 to monosyllables ; and even there it is used only when is difficult 
 to pronounce, or to avoid a clash of accents when an accented 
 syllable follows in the next word. 
 
 EXAMPLES : beg gufceg, beg Sifdjeg, beg aufeg, beg >orfeg or 2)orfg, 
 beg Xageg or Sagg ; but beg -Jftanneg 2Jhit, not beg -Jtfanng 3Jhit. 
 
 43. Usage varies in regard to adding e in the dative singular. 
 It is generally confined to monosyllables, and is often omitted even 
 there. It is always omitted in nouns of the first class. 
 
 EXAMPLES : bem Sage or Sag ; bent aufe or aug ; bem $onige or 
 $omg ; but always bem efyrer, bem SSogel, bem paten. 
 
 44. The strong declension, class I. Examples : ber paten, 
 spade \ ber Sefyrer, teacher-, ber 93ruber, brother-, bag ebaube, 
 building. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber paten ber Sefyrer ber Sruber bag eba'ube 
 
 beg patent beg Sefyrerg beg Sruberg beg ebdubeg 
 
 bem paten bem Se^rer bem Sruber bem ebaube 
 
 ben paten ben Sefyrer ben Sruber bag ebaube 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie paten 
 
 bie Sefyrer 
 
 bie Sruber 
 
 bie ebaube 
 
 ber paten 
 
 ber Sefyrer 
 
 ber Sriiber 
 
 ber eba'ube 
 
 ben paten 
 
 ben Sefyrern 
 
 ben 33riibern 
 
 ben eba'uben 
 
 bie paten 
 
 bie Sefyrer 
 
 bie Srttber 
 
 bie ebaube 
 
 45. Membership. 
 
 1. Masculines in el, en, er. 
 
 2. Neuters in el, en, er, d)en, lein, and those beginning with the 
 prefix ge and ending in e. 
 
12 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 3. Two feminines : 9Jtutter and Softer. 
 
 NOTE i. Here belong infinitives used as nouns ; also ber $tife. 
 
 NOTE 2. No monosyllabic nouns belong to this declension, except 
 occasionally bd3 $nie. 
 
 NOTE 3. Nouns in cfjen and lein are neuter and usually have the stem- 
 vowel mutated. 
 
 46. Vowel mutation in class I. 
 
 1. 21 masculines in el, en, er (327). 
 
 2. 3)a3 Softer. 
 
 3. Two feminines : Sautter and Sod)ter. 
 
 47. The following nouns of this class generally omit n in the 
 nominative singular: ber $riebe, ber $unle, ber eban!e, ber 
 laube, ber aufe, ber 9Jame, ber Same, ber Scfyabe, and ber 3Bide. 
 
 48. 2)er $elfen often drops en in the nominative and accusative 
 singular. 
 
 49. The strong declension, class II. Examples: ber Sag, day; 
 bie Stabt, city, bag 
 
 youth, young man. 
 
 year; ber Sontg, king; ber Bungling, 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber Sag 
 
 bem Sage 
 ben Sag 
 
 bie Sage 
 ber Sage 
 
 bie tabt 
 ber tabt 
 ber tabt 
 bie tabt 
 
 bie tabte 
 ber tabte 
 
 ber Sbnig ber Bungling 
 
 bem 
 ba 
 
 bie 
 ber 
 
 bem $bnig 
 ben 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie Sbnige 
 ber $bmge 
 
 bem ^tingling 
 ben Bungling 
 
 bie Sunglinge 
 ber ^iingltnge 
 
 ben ^agen ben^tdbten ben Qa^ren ben 5lonigen 
 
 bie Sage bie tcibte bie ^afyre bie ^bntge bie Qiingltnge 
 
 50. Membership. 
 
 1. Most masculine monosyllabic and many polysyllabic nouns. 
 
 2. Feminines: 
 
 (a) Mutating : about 33 monosyllables, mostly in t, b, or (324); 
 and compounds in tunft and flud)t, as bie 2lu!unft, bie 
 (//) Those ending in ni and fal, as bie Seforgm3, bie 
 
THE NOUN 13 
 
 3. Neuters: 
 
 (a) All neuters in nig and fal, as bag tnberntg, bag Sdjicffal. 
 (fr) All mutatable nonmutating neuter monosyllabic nouns, as . 
 bag $al)r, bag $aar (335). 
 
 (c) Two mutating neuters : bag $lo and bag Gfyor (51, A 3). 
 
 NOTE. No practical rule can be given for this class. All masculine and 
 neuter nouns not included in one of the other declensions belong to the 
 second class strong declension. 
 
 51. Vowel mutation in class II. 
 
 A. Monosyllables : 
 
 1. About 200 masculines (322). 
 
 2. All feminines (324). 
 
 3. Two neuters: bag fjlofc, pi. bte $loj$e, and bag (Sfyor, pi. bte 
 Gfybre or gfyore (66, 326). 
 
 B. Polysyllables: 
 
 1. Nine foreign masculines, as ber 2Utar (329). 
 
 2. Feminines: 
 
 (a) Compounds in funft and f(ud)t. 
 (f) ie 2lrmbruft and bte (Sefd&nwlft. 
 
 52. The strong declension, class III. Examples: ber 3Utann, 
 man\ bag $tnb, child-, bag aug, house; bag 2lltertum, antiquity. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber 5Ulann bag ^tnb bag aug bag 2Utertum 
 
 beg 5!Jlanneg beg $inbeg beg aufeg beg Slltertumg 
 
 bem 5Ranne bem Sinbe bem auje bem 3lltertitm 
 
 ben 9JJann bag Ktnb bag aug bag 3lltertum 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bte 5Ranner bte $tnber bte aufer bte 3l(tertumer 
 
 ber SRanner ber ^tnber ber aufer ber Slltertitmer 
 
 ben 3Kcinnern ben ^tnbern ben aufern ben 2Htertumern 
 
 bie banner bte ^tnber bte aufer bte 2lltcrtumcr 
 
 NOTE. Nouns in turn mutate the vowel of this suffix and take er in the 
 plural. See also 74, 5. 
 
14 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 53. Membership. 
 
 1. Eight masculine monosyllables (323). 
 
 2. About 50 neuter monosyllables (325, 333). 
 
 3. Eight neuter polysyllables (331). 
 
 4. All nouns ending in turn (74, 5). 
 
 54. Vowel mutation in class III. All mutatable nouns of this 
 class have vowel mutation. 
 
 55. Recapitulation of vowel mutation. Most monosyllabic and 
 polysyllabic nouns do not mutate ; but a large number of nouns, 
 especially monosyllables, do mutate. The mutating nouns fall into 
 the following groups : 
 
 A. Monosyllables : 
 
 1. About 200 masculines (322, 323). Six of these take er in the 
 plural and the rest take e. 
 
 2. All feminines (324). 
 
 3. About 35 neuters: 
 
 (a) 33 with plural in er (325). 
 
 () Two with plural in e: bag $Iof$, pi. bie $lbj$e, an ^ bag @fyor, 
 pi. bie Sfjbre or 6f>ore (66, 326). 
 
 NOTE. The group of nonmutating monosyllables is very large. It in- 
 cludes about 265 masculines and all neuters except about 35. For a list of 
 the more common nonmutating monosyllables see 333-336. 
 
 B. Polysyllables with vowel mutation. 
 
 Only a very small number of polysyllabic strong nouns have 
 vowel mutation. To this group belong : 
 
 1. 21 masculines in el, en, er (327). 
 
 2. Two masculines in turn : ber 3Reirf)tum and ber $rrtum (74,5). 
 
 3. Nine foreign masculines (329). 
 
 4. The feminines Gutter, od)ter, 5lrmbruft, and efcfyrrjulft, and 
 the feminine compounds in funft and fludjt, as bie 2(ugfunft, pi. bie 
 aUtgtiinfte. 
 
 5. All neuters in turn (74, 5), bag Softer, and bag emarf), bag 
 efyalt, bag ettmnb, bag ofyital (331-332). 
 
THE NOUN 15 
 
 56. The weak declension. The weak declension contains only 
 masculine and feminine nouns. Masculines add n or en in all cases 
 except the nominative singular. Feminines add n or en only in 
 the plural. 
 
 57. Examples : bet Snabe, boy ; bie $rau, lady ; ber tubent, 
 student ; bie Sefyrerin, lady teacher bet err, gentleman, Mr. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 bet $nabe bie grau ber tubent bie Sefyrerin ber err 
 
 be3 $naben ber grau be3 tubenten ber Sefyrerin be errn 
 
 bem $naben ber grau bem tubenten ber Sefyrerin bem errn 
 
 ben $naben bie $rau ben tubenten bie Sefyrerin ben errn 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie Snaben bie grauen bie tubenten bie Sefyrerinnen bie erren 
 
 ber ^naben ber grauen ber tubenten ber 2efyrerinnen ber erren 
 
 ben ^naben ben ^rauen ben tubenten benSefyrerinnen benerren 
 
 bie $naben bie ^rauen bie tubenten bie Sefyrerinnen bie erren 
 
 NOTE i. Weak nouns do not have vowel mutation. 
 NOTE 2. No neuter nouns belong to the weak declension. 
 NOTE 3. Feminines formed from masculines by adding in double the n 
 before adding the plural ending en. 
 
 NOTE 4. The noun err omits the inflectional e in the singular. 
 
 58. Membership. 
 
 1. All feminine nouns except those contained in the second 
 class strong declension (50, 2), and Gutter and Xodjter (45, 3). 
 
 2. Masculine nouns in e representing living beings, as ber Snabe, 
 ber Soroe, ber 2lffe ; and two representing things : ber 23urf)ftabe 
 and ber Sefyttte. // 
 
 NOTE. Here also belong a number of masculines which do not end in e 
 in the nominative singular, as ber raf (337). 
 
 3. Foreign words : 
 
 (a) Masculines accented on the last syllable and representing 
 living beings, as ber 2egat. 
 
l6 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. Nouns ending in accented al, an, tin, ar, tir, eur, ier, or, 
 belong to the second class strong declension whether they represent 
 living beings or lifeless things, as ber eneral, ber $umpan, ber <5out)eran, 
 ber $omtnentar, ber <Se!retar, ber (Eljafjeur, ber Officer, ber 
 
 () Masculines in accented anb, enb, ant, ent, and grapfy, repre- 
 senting persons or things, and also ber Cornet and ber planet. 
 Examples: ber s IRulttpltlanb, ber SRinuenb, ber ga&rtfant, ber 
 tubent, ber ^aragrapfy. 
 
 59. The mixed declension. The mixed declension uses strong 
 endings in the singular and weak in the plural. Nouns taken 
 from French, English, and other modern languages add g in the 
 plural. (For examples see 61,^3.) The noun erg is irregular m 
 declension. 
 
 60. Examples: bag 2luge, 'eye\ ber SDoltor, doctor-, bag @iu= 
 btum, study. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 bag 2luge ber o!tor bag tubium bag erg 
 
 beg 2lugeg beg SDoftorg beg 6tubiumg beg ereng 
 
 bem Singe bem 2)o!tor bem tubium bem 
 
 bag 3luge ben SDoftor bag tubium bag erg 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie 2lugen bte 2)oftoren bie (Stubten bie 
 
 ber 2lugen ber oltoren ber Stubien ber 
 
 ben 3lugen ben o!toren ben 6tubten ben 
 
 bte 3lugen bie oltoren bie tubien bie ergen 
 
 61. Membership. 
 
 A. Native German words : 
 
 1. About 50 masculines, a few of which are monosyllabic (338). 
 
 2. About 15 neuters, mostly monosyllabic (339). 
 
 B. Many foreign words : 
 
 i. Masculine nouns in on, or, ug, and tug from Latin and Greek. 
 (See notes i and 2 below.) 
 
THE NOUN I/ 
 
 NOTE i. Both on and or are short and unaccented in the singular but 
 long and accented in the plural, as ber 2)o!tor, pi. bie 2)oftoren ; ber 2) a* 
 tnon, pi. bie 2)amonen. Words in accented on, or, belong to the second 
 class strong declension, as ber 9)2ajor, pi. bie JTCajor'e. 
 
 NOTE 2. Foreign masculines in u3 and iug usually remain unchanged in 
 the singular, as ber -ftunttug, beg 9?Utttiug, bie -ftuntten. Those in ug are 
 going over to the second class strong declension, as ber Iobti3, beg lo= 
 buffeg, bie lobuffe or loben. 
 
 2. Neuter nouns from Latin and Greek : 
 (a) Those ending in a, as bag 2)rama. 
 
 () Those ending in eum, turn, uum, on (unaccented), which in 
 the plural become een, ten, uen, en, as bag SJtufeum, pi. bie -JKufeen ; 
 bag tubiutn, pi. bie tubien ; bag ifiirf)on, pi. bie iftid)en. 
 
 (c) Those ending in il, al, with plural in ten. These nouns are 
 going over to the second class strong declension. Examples : bag 
 gofftl, pi. bie $offile or goffilten ; bag -JKineral, pi. bie 5RineraIe 
 or 3JJineralien. 
 
 (d) bag Snfcft and bag ^ntereffe. 
 
 3. Masculine and neuter nouns and a f ew f eminines from 
 French, English, and other modern languages. These words add g 
 in the plural. Notice the following examples : 
 
 ' bag SReftaurant beg Seftaurantg bie SReftaurantg 
 
 bie SSitta ber SSilla , bie SSiEag or ffitUen 
 
 ber Sorb beg Sorbs bie Sorbg 
 
 bie Sabp ber Sabt) bie Sabng or Sabteg 
 
 ber on beg ong bie $)ong 
 
 ber $af^a beg ^afc^ag bie 
 
 NOTE. Foreign words of the mixed declension are not usually accented 
 on the last syllable. Exceptions are nouns ending in il, al, bag 3nfelt, and 
 a few others. 
 
 62. Peculiarities of nouns. The singular form of masculine and 
 neuter nouns of weight, measure, or quantity is used after numerals. 
 Two feminines, bie anb and bie 3Kar!, also belong here. 
 
 Karl tranf groei lag 2Baffer. 
 Carl drank two glasses of water. 
 
1 8 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 ift funfjefyn 
 The horse is fifteen hands high. 
 
 )ag 3^ mmer foftet groei 9Jtarf. 
 The price of the room is two marks. 
 
 63. The noun denoting the material weighed or measured is in 
 apposition to the noun of weight, measure, or quantity; but if ac- 
 companied by an article or a demonstrative adjective, it is in the 
 genitive, or in the dative with t)on ; if accompanied by an adjective 
 without the article it may be in apposition or in the genitive. 
 
 Sroei lag 2Baffer, mit groei lag SBafjer, two glasses of water, with 
 
 two glasses of water. 
 ib mir groei lag beg fallen SBafferg or t)on bem fatten SBaffer, give 
 
 me two glasses of the cold water. 
 
 3tt)ei Ia falte 2Bafjer or fallen 2Bafjerg, two glasses of cold water. 
 JJtit roei lag faltem 28afjer or jeneg 2Bafjerg, with two glasses of 
 
 cold water or of that water. 
 
 64. Some nouns have no plural, as bte 2lfcf)e, ber afer, bie 
 5Mat^ematif, ber Sn^alt; others no singular, as bie Item, bie Dftern, 
 and bie $erien. 
 
 65. Nouns with borrowed plurals. 
 
 ber Sau be Saueg bie 33auten building 
 
 ! ber Seruf beg Serufg bie Serufgarten calling 
 
 v bag Seftreben beg SSeftrebeng bie 33eflrebungen effort 
 
 ber Setrug beg Setrugg bie Setriigereien fraud 
 
 ber Sunb beg S3unbeg bie Sunbnifje league 
 
 bag @rbe beg 6rbeg bie rbfd^aften inheritance 
 
 bag $euer beg ^euerg bie ^euer3britnfte conflagration 
 
 bie gurdjt ber gurd^t bie Sefurdjtungen fear 
 
 c violence, violent 
 bte eroalt ber eroalt bte eroalttattgfetten 4 
 
 bag liicf beg litcfeg bie titcfgfdae I f ortune > fortu ~ 
 
 L nate experiences 
 
THE NOUN 
 
 bie imft 
 
 ber unft 
 
 bie imftbegeigungen 
 
 favor 
 
 ber Summer 
 
 beg $ummerg 
 
 bie ^iimmerniffe 
 
 sorrow 
 
 bag Seben 
 
 beg 2ebeng 
 
 bie 9JJenfd)enleben 
 
 life, lives 
 
 bag Seib 
 
 beg Seibeg 
 
 bie Seiben 
 
 suffering 
 
 ber Sofyn 
 
 beg Sofyneg 
 
 bie Selo^nungen 
 
 reward 
 
 ber 9Korb 
 
 beg TOorbeg 
 
 bie -JKorbtaten 
 
 murder 
 
 ber Sat 
 
 beg Sateg 
 
 bie Satfd^Idge 
 
 counsel 
 
 ber 5Raub 
 
 beg Saubeg 
 
 bie Sdubereien 
 
 robbery 
 
 ^er dfjmuc! 
 
 beg d^mudteg 
 
 bie d^mudtfad^en 
 
 ornament 
 
 ] ber egen 
 
 beg egeng 
 
 bie egnungen 
 
 blessing 
 
 ^ ber treit 
 
 beg treiteg 
 
 bie treitigfeiten 
 
 dispute 
 
 ' ber Sob 
 
 beg Sobeg 
 
 bie Sobegfatte 
 
 death 
 
 bag Ungliic? 
 
 beg Ungliidtg 
 
 bie Ungludfgfdtle 
 
 misfortune 
 
 f /7W/CY777 twnrh- 
 
 ber SSerrat 
 
 beg SSerratg 
 
 bie SSerrdtereien < 
 
 . 
 
 
 L 
 
 erous acts 
 
 s ber 3<mf 
 
 beg 3<*n!eg 
 
 bie 3imfereien 
 
 quarrel 
 
 66. Differentiation of certain nouns. 
 
 ^ ber Sanb 
 
 beg Sanbeg 
 
 bie S9dnbe 
 
 volume 
 
 bag Sanb 
 
 beg Sanbeg 
 
 bte Sdnber 
 
 ribbon 
 
 ybag S5anb 
 
 beg Sanbeg 
 
 bie Sanbe 
 
 bond, fetter 
 
 bie Sanbe 
 
 ber S3anbe 
 
 bie Sanben 
 
 band, troop 
 
 ber Saiier 
 
 beg <3auerg 
 
 bie 33auern 
 
 peasant 
 
 | ber 93auer 
 
 beg x3auerg 
 
 bie 93auer 
 
 bird cage 
 
 ber Sunb 
 
 beg <3iinbeg 
 
 bieSunbnifje(Sunbe) 
 
 alliance 
 
 bag Sunb 
 
 beg "Ounbeg 
 
 bie 93imbe 
 
 bundle 
 
 ber @hor 
 
 beg v^-borg 
 
 bie 6bbre 
 
 choir 
 
 bag 
 
 beg 
 
 bie 
 
 < choir (part of a 
 
 ber ienfttnann 
 
 bie ien[imdnner 
 
 
 {servant ( i?i 
 \ 
 I. a home) 
 
 bet Sienfimann beg ienftmanne3 bie ienftmannen 
 
20 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 bag 2)ing 
 
 beg Singeg 
 
 bie inge 
 
 ( thing (a general 
 \ term) 
 
 bag ing 
 
 beg ingeg 
 
 bie Singer 
 
 f thing (a specific 
 
 
 
 
 i. term) 
 
 ber orn 
 
 beg S)orneg 
 
 bieornen(2)orner) thorn 
 
 
 
 bie Some 
 
 varieties of thorns 
 
 ber (gffeft 
 
 beg gffclts 
 
 bie (gffcfte 
 
 effect 
 
 
 
 bie ffeften 
 
 movable goods 
 
 ber @rbe 
 
 beg @rben 
 
 bie @rben 
 
 heir 
 
 bag @rbe 
 
 beg grbeg 
 
 bie @rbfrf)aften 
 
 inheritance 
 
 \ ber gaben 
 
 beg gabeng 
 
 bie gtiben 
 
 thread 
 
 M ber $aben 
 
 beg gabeng 
 
 bie ^aben 
 
 fathom 
 
 ber glur 
 
 beg ^lurg 
 
 bie $lure 
 
 entrance hall 
 
 I 
 
 bie $lur 
 
 ber ^lur 
 
 bie gluren 
 
 (field or entrance 
 { hall 
 
 |bag efjalt 
 
 beg e^alteg 
 
 bie e^dlter 
 
 salary 
 
 ^ber efyalt 
 
 beg e^alteg 
 
 bie exalte 
 
 intrinsic value 
 
 /bag ejtcfyt 
 
 beg eficfytg 
 
 bie efid)ter 
 
 face 
 
 : bag efid)t 
 
 beg efid)tg 
 
 bie efidjte 
 
 vision 
 
 ber eibe 
 
 ,beg eiben 
 
 bie eiben 
 
 heathen 
 
 bie eibe 
 
 ber eibe 
 
 bie eiben 
 
 heath 
 
 bag orn 
 
 beg orneg 
 
 bie Corner 
 
 horn 
 
 
 
 bie orne 
 
 kinds of horn 
 
 1 ber ut 
 
 beg uteg 
 
 bie iite 
 
 hat 
 
 -bie ut 
 
 ber ut 
 
 bie uten 
 
 guard 
 
 J ber $unbe 
 
 beg ^unben 
 
 bie ^unben 
 
 customer 
 
 bie $unbe 
 
 ber $unbe 
 
 bie Sunben 
 
 news 
 
 A ber Saben 
 
 beg Sabeng 
 
 bie Saben (Saben) 
 
 shutter 
 
 ber Saben 
 
 beg Sabeng 
 
 bie Saben 
 
 store 
 
 bag Sanb 
 
 beg Sanbeg 
 
 bie Sdnber 
 
 land 
 
 
 
 bie Sanbe 
 
 states, districts {parts 
 of a political whole) 
 
 NOTE. The 
 
 old plural form 
 
 Sanbe sometimes occurs in poetry in place 
 
 of Sanber, and 
 
 remains also in 
 
 proper names, as bie 
 
 s jieberlcmbe. 
 
THE NOUN 
 
 21 
 
 bag td)t 
 
 beg Sidjteg 
 
 bte Stater 
 
 light 
 
 bag Sid&t 
 
 beg Sidjteg 
 
 bte Std^te 
 
 candle 
 
 ber Sat 
 
 beg Sateg 
 
 bte Satfcfyltige 
 
 advice 
 
 ber Sat 
 
 beg Sateg 
 
 bie Sate 
 
 councilor 
 
 ber d)ilb 
 
 beg cfyilbeg 
 
 bie djilbe 
 
 shield 
 
 bag rf)iib 
 
 beg ^tlbeg 
 
 bte d^tlber 
 
 shop sign 
 
 ber rfjur^ 
 
 beg djjurgeg 
 
 bie c^itrge 
 
 apron for men 
 
 bte rf)ttre 
 
 ber dt)ure 
 
 bte dtjitrgen 
 
 apron for women 
 
 ber ee 
 
 beg eeg 
 
 bie een 
 
 lake 
 
 bte ee 
 
 ber ee 
 
 bie een 
 
 sea 
 
 ) ber tod 
 
 beg todeg 
 
 bie tbde 
 
 cane 
 
 ber tod 
 
 beg todeg 
 
 bie tode - 
 
 story (of a house) 
 
 r^ber trauft 
 
 beg traufteg 
 
 bte trau^e 
 
 ostrich 
 
 ber traufc 
 
 beg trau^eg 
 
 bie trau^e 
 
 combat, bouquet 
 
 ber etl 
 
 beg Setlg 
 
 bie Xeile 
 
 part 
 
 bag Scil 
 
 beg ^etlg 
 
 bie Xeile 
 
 share 
 
 bag Sor 
 
 beg Sorg 
 
 bie Xore 
 
 gate 
 
 ber STor 
 
 beg ^oren 
 
 bie Soren 
 
 fool 
 
 bag !udf) 
 
 beg 2itd)eg 
 
 bie Sitdjer 
 
 piece of cloth 
 
 bag Zud) 
 
 beg Sud^eg 
 
 bie Xudje 
 
 kind cf cloth 
 
 bag SBort 
 
 beg SBorteg 
 
 bie Sffiorter 
 
 word 
 
 
 
 bie 2Borte 
 
 f words in connected 
 
 , j 
 
 
 
 
 L speech 
 
 67. Proper nouns. Proper nouns add g in the genitive singular. 
 Those ending in a sibilant (f, , fd), , 5) take the apostrophe only 
 or add eng in the genitive, but names of places take t)on, as bte 
 tra^en Don $artg. Feminines in e may take either g or ng. But 
 proper nouns, except neuter names of countries, take no ending 
 when preceded by the definite article. 
 
 68. When a proper noun is preceded by a title (except err, 
 which is always declined) the name only is declined. But if the 
 definite article is used before the title, the title and not the name 
 is declined. 
 
22 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 69. Examples : 
 Sari griij 
 SarlS gri$' 
 
 or 
 
 Sari 
 Sari 
 
 Suife 
 
 Serta 
 
 ber fleine Sari 
 
 SuifenS 
 
 SertaS 
 
 beS lleinen Sari 
 
 or SuifeS 
 
 
 
 Suife 
 
 Serta 
 
 bem lleinen Sari 
 
 Suife 
 
 Serta 
 
 ben lleinen Sari 
 
 bag t>ereinigte SDeutfd^Ianb Saifer SBil^elm ber Saifer 
 
 beg oereinigten eutfd^lanb Saifer 2Btl^elmg be Saifer^ 3BilE)elm 
 
 bem t)ereinigten 2)eutfd^lanb Saifer 2Bil^elm bem Saifer 2Bil^elm 
 
 ba t)ereinigte SDeutfd^lanb Saifer 2Bil^elm ben Saifer SBilfyelm 
 
 err ^rofeffor <Sd^mibt ber err ^Jrofeffor d^mibt 
 
 errn ^rofeffor <5dE)mibt3 be errn $rofeffor d^mibt 
 errn ^rofeffor djmibt bem errn ^rofeffor d^mibt 
 errn ^5rofeffor d^mibt ben errn $rofeffor d^mibt 
 
 NOTE. 2)a3 Dereinigte 3)eutfd^lanb means .united Germany, err ^5ro= 
 feffot C^tntbt, simply Professor Schmidt, and not Mr. Professor Schmidt. 
 
 70. Gender. Very few rules in respect to the gender of German 
 nouns are practical (34). A careful application of the following 
 statements, however, may prove helpful. 
 
 71. Nouns denoting living beings usually follow natural gender. 
 
 72. Masculine are : 
 
 1. The names of the seasons, months, days, and points of the 
 compass : 
 
 (a) grilling, ommer, erbft, SBinter. 
 
 (V) Sanuar, gebruar, 3Kar, 2lprtl, 3Kai, $uni, $uli, Slugufi, 
 September, Dftober, 3tot)ember, 3)eember. 
 
 (c) onntag, SJlontag, ientag, SRittroocI), SDonner^tag, ^reitag, 
 onnabenb or (SamStag. 
 
 (d) ber 9Jorben, ber uben, ber Dften, ber 2Befien. 
 
 2. Nouns in m, ling, id^, ig, as ber Saum, ber 3tin9lhtg> ber 
 Seppid^, ber Sonig. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS : ba3 eim, bag Samm, bie 
 
0& 
 
 THE NOUN 23 
 
 3. Nouns in er denoting agency : ber dfjneiber. 
 
 4. Nouns in en, unless they are infinitives used as nouns (74, 3) : 
 ber arten, ber Dfen, but bag Seben, bag Semen. 
 
 5. Most monosyllables formed from the roots of verbs, as frf)lie= 
 f;en, ber (2>$lu; binben, ber Sanb. 
 
 73. Feminine are: 
 
 1. The names of German rivers. Exceptions: ber Sftfyetn, ber 
 Jfedfar, ber 9Katn, ber Sober, ber Sorfjer, ber Serf), and a few others. 
 Most foreign rivers are masculine : ber $orban, ber SJliffiffippt. 
 
 2. The names of trees, plants, flowers, and fruits : bte (Std)e, bie 
 2;raube, bie 9^ofe, bte Strne. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS : ber Slpfel, ber $ftrfid), ber Sorbeer, ber 
 
 3. All nouns ending in ei, fyett, lett, fdfjaft, ung, and in : bte 
 33raueret, bie SBetgfyeit, bte Sletntgfeit, bte $reunbfrf)aft, bie 33ebin= 
 gung, bie greunbtn. 
 
 4. All nouns in e derived from adjectives and the roots of verbs, 
 as fait, bie Salte ; Iteben, bie Stebe. 
 
 74. Neuter are : 
 
 1. The names of cities, countries, and islands: Serltn, 2)eutfrf)= 
 lanb, ^ranfreid^, tgtlten. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS : bie (Sd^roeij, bie iir!et, bie ^Sfalj, and a few others. 
 
 2. The names of minerals, except ber tafyl. Examples: bag 
 olb, bag 6tfen, bag tlber. 
 
 3. All parts of speech other than nouns, used substantively and 
 not referring to persons : bag efyen, bag $iir unb SBtber, bag 2lrf) 
 unb 2Bel), but ber 2Ute, bte ute. 
 
 4. The letters of the alphabet: bag 31, bag 51. 
 
 5. All nouns in turn and tel, except ber $rrtum and ber 3ftetrf)= 
 turn. Examples: bag $urftentum, bag SDrttteL 
 
 6. All nouns in d)en and letn. These endings are diminutive 
 suffixes and usually cause mutation, as bte $rau, bag gtauletn ;. 
 bte 5Kagb, bag 
 
24 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE 
 
 75. Adjectives are of two kinds : 
 
 ' (a) The definite article (25). 
 
 ) The demonstrative and interrogative adjectives 
 
 1. Limiting^ (91, 97). 
 
 (<:) The indefinite article and the possessive and 
 indefinite adjectives (30, 89, 90). 
 
 2. Qualifying, as gut, alt. 
 
 76. Most adjectives in German are declined, but qualifying 
 adjectives used in the predicate or appositively are declined only 
 when accompanied by an article. 
 
 77. There are two adjective declensions, the strong and the 
 weak. An adjective is declined strong when no determining word 
 precedes it, and weak if it is preceded by a determining word. See 
 note, and 78-80. 
 
 NOTE*. When eitrig-, mefyrer-, roenig, mel, and fold) precede the quali- 
 fying adjective it is weak in the singular and strong (or sometimes weak) 
 in the plural (90). 
 
 78. The determining words are : 
 
 1. ber, biefer, jener, jeber, ad, einig-, mefyrer- (90, note 5 ; 91). 
 
 NOTE. The masculine of mefyrer- is not used in the singular. 
 
 2. etn, lein, rnein, betn, fein, unfer, euer, tfyr, 5fyr ( 32 )- 
 
 3. mcmd)(er), fol$(er), tnel(er), n)eldj(er) (80; 90, note i; and 96). 
 
 79. The words ein, !etn, mein, etc. (78, 2) have no ending in the 
 nominative singular masculine and neuter and in the accusative 
 singular neuter. The adjective following them, therefore, takes 
 the strong endings (masculine er and neuter e3) in these three 
 cases. Thus we have what is sometimes called the mixed declen- 
 sion of adjectives. 
 
 80. The words given under 78, 3, sometimes omit their inflec- 
 tional endings, and the adjective following them then has strong 
 endings, as man$ guter 3Utcmn, triel gute3 23rot. 
 
c(cr) 
 
 WEAK 
 
 e(i 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 CO 
 
 / 'ln~ 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE 25 
 
 81. Table of endings of the adjective declensions. 
 
 STRONG 
 
 er e e3 
 
 en er en 
 
 em er em 
 
 A en e e$ 
 
 e e e 
 
 er er er 
 
 en en en 
 
 - e e e 
 
 82. The strong endings are like those of the definite article, ex- 
 cept that the genitive singular masculine and neuter of qualifying 
 adjectives is always weak, that is, ends in en. Present usage does 
 not admit the old genitive ending e3, but it is still retained in a 
 few fixed expressions, as reined ergen, gute SRutg. Limiting ad- 
 jectives (75), however, end in e3 in the genitive singular masculine 
 and neuter. 
 
 i. Notice the vowels in bie, ba3, and e, e3. 
 
 83. Two or more qualifying adjectives used with a noun follow 
 the same declension : nom. guter alter 5Rann, gen. guten alten 
 3Jlanne3; nom. ber gute alte SRann, gen. be3 guten alten -IJJanneS. 
 
 84. The strong declension (adjective + noun). 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 guter 3Dtann gute $rau gute 
 
 guten -JftanneS guter $rau guten 
 
 gutem 9Jlanne guter $rau gutem Stnbe 
 
 guten 3Kann gute grau gute^ Sinb 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 gute Scanner gute ^rauen gute $inber 
 
 guter banner guter ^rauen guter $tnber 
 
 guten TOannern guten ^rauen guten ^tnbern 
 
 gute SRcinner gute ^rauen gute 
 
26 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 85. The weak declension (determining word -+- adjective -f noun). 
 
 bet gute 3Jlann 
 beg guten -Kanneg 
 bem guten 5Jtanne 
 ben guten SJJann 
 
 bie guten Scanner 
 ber guten 9Jtdnner 
 ben guten DJlannern 
 bte guten -JRanner 
 
 fein guter SWann (79) 
 feineg guten 9Jtanneg 
 feinem guten 9Jtanne 
 feinen guten 5Rann 
 
 leine guten -JRanner 
 leiner guten 9JZanner 
 feinen guten s JRannern 
 feine guten Scanner 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 bte gute $rau 
 ber guten $rau 
 ber guten grau 
 bte gute grau 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie guten $rauen 
 ber guten grauen 
 ben guten gtauen 
 bte guten grauen 
 SINGULAR 
 
 feine gute grew 
 feiner guten $rau 
 feiner guten grau 
 feine gute $ratt 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 feine guten $rauen 
 feiner guten grauen 
 feinen guten grauen 
 feine guten grauen 
 
 bag gute 
 be guten 
 bem guten Sinbe 
 ba gute ^inb 
 
 bie guten Sinber 
 ber guten Sinber 
 ben guten ^inbern 
 bie guten ^inber 
 
 fein gute Sinb 
 feineS guten SinbeS 
 feinem guten Sinbe 
 fein gute3 Kinb 
 
 feine guten Sinber 
 feiner guten Sinber 
 feinen guten Sinbern 
 feine guten ^inber 
 
 86. Adjectives used as nouns retain the adjective declension. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 uter ute ber ute bag ute fein uter 
 
 uten uter beg uten beg uten feineg uten 
 
 utem uter bem uten bem uten feinem uten 
 
 uten ute ben uten bag ute feinen uten 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 ute 
 uter 
 uten 
 ute 
 
 bie uten 
 ber uten 
 ben uten 
 bie uten 
 
 feine uten 
 feiner uten 
 feinen uten 
 feine uten 
 
 einigeg ute 
 einigeg uten 
 einigem uten 
 einigeg ute 
 
 einige uten 
 einiger uten 
 einigen uten 
 einige uten 
 
 NOTE, itttgeg ute in the singular means some good (an abstract noun) ; 
 in the plural, some good things or some good people. 
 
THE ADJECTIVE 2/ 
 
 87. Participles used as adjectives or nouns are declined like 
 adjectives. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 gelefyrter SJlann 
 gelefyrten 3JZanne3 
 gelefyrtem -JRanne 
 gelefyrten SRann 
 
 bet elefyrte 
 be3 elefyrten 
 bem elefyrten 
 ben elefyrten 
 
 !ein elefyrter 
 feineS elefyrten 
 feinem elefyrten 
 feinen elefyrten 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 gelefyrte banner bie elefyrten feme elefyrten 
 
 gelefyrter Scanner bet elefyrten feiner elefyrten 
 
 gelefyrten DJJannern ben elefyrten feinen ele^rten 
 
 ge!eE)tte banner bie elefyrten feine ele^rten 
 
 88. An adjective may be formed from the name of a city by 
 adding er. It is indeclinable and written with a capital (23, 7) : 
 nom. bet Sblner om, gen. be3 Joiner 2)om3, dat. bem fiblner 2)om, 
 ace. ben Joiner om. 
 
 89. The possessive adjectives are mein, bein, jein, i^r, fein, unfer, 
 euer, i^r, and ^^t. They are possessive adjectives when used before 
 a noun, as mein ut, feine $eber, unfer 33ud). For their declension 
 see 30 ; for their use as possessive pronouns see 136-140. 
 
 90. The indefinite numeral adjectives may be grouped as 
 follows : 
 
 1. Those containing the idea of number. 
 
 (a) Uninflected : allerfyanb, allerlei, all kinds qf-, ein paar, a few. 
 
 (b) Inflected: ember-, other \ beib-, both ; manrf), many a\ 
 tne^rer-, several ' \ jeber, each (never weak, but mixed (79) if pre- 
 ceded by the indefinite article). 
 
 (c) The indefinite article : ein, # , an (30). 
 
 2. Those expressing quantity. 
 
 (a) Uninflected : ein roenig, a little ; etnwS, some ; bi^en, little 
 (bit}. 
 
 (b) Inflected : gan, all, whole ; ^alb, half. 
 
28 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 3. Those expressing quantity before a noun in the singular, and 
 number before a noun in the plural. 
 
 (a) Uninflected : genug, enough ; mefyr, more ; lauter, eitel, noth- 
 ing but. 
 
 (&) Inflected (strong): all, all\ roeld), some. 
 
 (c) Inflected : eintg-, some, a few, harmonious-, gefamt, all, entire-, 
 famtlid), all, entire ; iibttg, the rest ; triel, much, pi. many ; roenig, 
 little, pi few. 
 
 (d) The negative article : feitt, not a, no (adj.). 
 
 NOTE i. When manrf) precedes the indefinite article it is not declined. 
 It is also sometimes not declined when it precedes another adjective. 
 Examples : mand) ein 3Jtann, mancfj eines 2ftanne3 ; mancf) guter .2JJann, 
 mantf) guten 2ftanne3, 
 
 NOTE 2. The form mefyrer- is a double comparative, being composed of 
 the comparative mefyr and the comparative suffix er. 
 
 NOTE 3. An article, or a demonstrative or a possessive adjective, pre- 
 ceding bi|tf)en, is in the neuter gender regardless of the gender of the noun 
 which follows bifjdjen. 
 
 NOTE 4. ang and fjalb are not declined when used alone before neuter 
 names of places, as nom. ganj 3)eutfrf)lanb, gen. gang 2)eutfdjlanb3, but 
 nom. ba3 ganje SDeutfdjlanb, gen. be3 garden 25eutfd)lanb3. 
 
 NOTE 5. 2111 before the definite article or a possessive adjective gener- 
 ally remains undeclined in the singular and sometimes also in the plural : 
 all bag SBaffer, all or alle meine Spfel. 
 
 91. The demonstrative adjectives are biefer, jener, bet (92), bet* 
 jelbe, berjenige (92), bet ntimlidje (85), and fold) (96). When they 
 do not limit a noun they are demonstrative pronouns (152). The 
 declension of biejer and berfelbe is as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 ^ 
 
 biefer biefc biefeS biefe berfelbe biefelbe ba^felbe biefelben 
 
 biefe3 biefer biefe biefer be^felben berfelben be^felben berfelben 
 
 biefem biefer biefem btefen bemfelben berfelben bemf elben benfelben 
 
 btefen biefe biefe^ biefe benfelben biefelbe ba^felbe btefelben 
 
 NOTE. Limiting adjectives do not take en in the genitive singular mas- 
 culine and neuter (75, 82). 
 
THE ADJECTIVE 29 
 
 92. er as a demonstrative adjective is declined like the definite 
 article. SDerjenige is declined like berfelbe. 
 
 93. The forms be3gleid)en (sing.) and bergleidjen (pi., but used 
 also of the sing.) are indeclinable. 
 
 94. 2)iefe3, neuter nominative and accusative singular, often 
 drops its ending e3 and becomes bie3. 
 
 95. tefer and jener call attention to nearness and remoteness, 
 while bet merely emphasizes. To indicate its stress bet is often 
 printed with spaced type. 
 
 SDtefer 3Jtann ift reid), jener ift arm. 
 This man is rich, that one is poor. 
 
 2)er 9Jtann ift reid). 
 That man is rich. 
 
 3in ber infid)t fyaben @te redjt. 
 In that respect you are right. 
 
 96. oldj is never declined when it precedes the indefinite article, 
 and is often not declined before another adjective. Examples : 
 nom. fold) ein 3Jlann, gen. fold) eine3 -Dtanne^ ; nom. fold) gute3 
 33rot, gen. fold) guten 33rote3. 
 
 97. The interrogative adjectives are roeldjer, which, what, and 
 fiir etn, what kind of. They are declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 roeldjer 9Jfarm roelcfye -JRtinner 
 
 roeldjeS 3Ulanne3 tpeld^er Scanner 
 
 tueld^em 9Jtanne roeldjen 3JJannern 
 
 tuelc^en 5Rann t^eld^e banner 
 
 fiir ein 9Kann tt>a3 fiir banner 
 
 fiir etne3 9Jlanne n)a fiir 3Mdnner 
 
 fiir etnem 3Wanne raa fiir 9Jidnnern 
 
 fiir einen SUtann raag fiir SJldnner 
 
 NOTE. 2Beldj)er as an interrogative adjective is declined like biefer. 
 
HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 98. Comparison of adjectives. Adjectives are compared in Ger- 
 man by adding to the positive er to form the comparative and ft 
 to form the superlative. If the positive ends in a dental (b, t) 
 or a sibilant (f, j$, fd), $), the superlative adds eft. Participles in 
 enb or et add ft. Adjectives in el, en, er, suppress an e if another 
 syllable is added which begins with e, as ebel, eblet, bet eble, ben 
 eblen or ben ebeln -JRcmn. Examples : 
 
 deep 
 
 tief 
 
 tiefer 
 
 tiefft 
 
 am tiefften 
 
 diligent 
 
 fletfeig 
 
 fleifetger 
 
 fletfetgft 
 
 am fleifcigften 
 
 wild 
 
 rotlb 
 
 ttnlber 
 
 nrilbeft 
 
 am roilbeften 
 
 old 
 
 alt 
 
 alter 
 
 alteft 
 
 am alteften 
 
 sweet 
 
 w 
 
 fiifeer 
 
 ffljjep 
 
 am fii^eften 
 
 charming retjenb reigenber reigenbft am reigenbften 
 cultured gebilbet gebilbeter gebtlbetft am gebilbetften 
 
 99. A number of adjectives are irregular in comparison. 
 
 good 
 much 
 
 little 
 
 large 
 near 
 high 
 
 NOTE, -iftaf) adds c in the superlative, 
 bfoer, ber foofie SBaum, etn 
 
 gut 
 
 beffer 
 
 beft 
 
 am beften 
 
 tnel 
 
 me^r 
 
 meift 
 
 am meiften 
 
 
 r n>emger 
 
 roemgft 
 
 am roenigften 
 
 toenig 
 
 L minber 
 
 minbeft 
 
 am mtnbeften 
 
 grofe 
 
 grower 
 
 grb^t 
 
 am grofcten 
 
 nal) 
 
 na^er 
 
 nad^ft 
 
 am ndd)ften 
 
 ^0^ 
 
 ^o^er 
 
 fyocfyft 
 
 am l)5d)ften 
 
 drops c when e follows, as 
 
 100. A number of adjectives, used only in the comparative and 
 superlative, are derived from adverbs. 
 
 ADVERB COMPARATIVE 
 
 au^en ber bie ba3 tiu^ere 
 
 erft ber bie ba etftere 
 
 fytnten ber bie ba3 fytntere 
 
 tnnen ber bie ba tnnere 
 
 le^t ber bie ba le^tere 
 
 SUPERLATIVE 
 ber bie bag du^erfte 
 ber bie bag erfte 
 ber bie bag fytnterfte 
 ber bie bag tnnerfte 
 ber bie bag lete 
 
 am aufjerften 
 am erften 
 am fymterften 
 am innerften 
 am le^ten 
 
THE ADJECTIVE 31 
 
 101. The comparison of equality is expressed by fo . . . al, 
 fo , . . nrie; ebenfo . . . ate, ebenfo . . . rate. 
 
 @ie ift jo (ebenfo) reidj ate (rote) er. 
 
 She is as rich as he is. 
 
 <5ie ift ebenfo fjiibfd) ate (rote) ifyre Scfyroefter. 
 
 She is just as pretty as her sister. 
 
 102. 9JJefyr and roeniger are used in comparing two qualities of the 
 
 same object. 
 
 @r ift mefyr fleifeig ate begabt. 
 
 He is more industrious than talented. 
 @r ift roeniger begabt ate fleifctg. 
 He is less talented than industrious. 
 
 103. The English than is expressed in German by ate, and 
 the ... the by je . . . je or je . . . befto. 
 
 Carl is larger than his brother. 
 Sari ift grower ate fein SBruber. 
 The sooner the better. 
 3e e^er je (befto) beffer. 
 
 104. The superlative of adjectives may be classified as follows : 
 the relative, as ber, bic, ba3 tieffte; the am form (used only in the pred- 
 icate), as am tiefften ; and the absolute, as liebft, or fjodjft intereffant. 
 
 105. The relative superlative of an adjective expresses the high- 
 est degree with reference to two or more persons or things. 
 
 grit* ift ber flei^igfte Snabe in ber 6dule, Fred is the most studious 
 
 boy in school. 
 Sari fyat einen gro^en 2lpfel, aber gri$ l)at ben gtb^ten, Carl has a 
 
 large apple, but Fred has the largest one. 
 griis ift ber fletfjigfte t>on alien, Fred is the most studious of all. 
 Unfer au ift bag neuefte in biefer <5traf$e, our house is the newest 
 
 in this street. 
 
 NOTE. In the third and fourth sentences ber fleifctgfte and ba3 neuefte 
 are predicate superlatives (106). 
 
32 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 106. The superlative degree of a predicate adjective is expressed : 
 
 1. By the relative superlative. 
 
 $arl ift grofc. 
 Carl is tall. 
 
 Sari ift bet grojste t)on ben bret Snaben. 
 Carl is the tallest of the three boys. 
 
 NOTE. See also 105, third and fourth sentences. 
 
 NOTE. A predicate adjective is one that is used as complement to a copu- 
 lative verb. 
 
 2. By the am form, which is a phrase in the dative case, and 
 is used : 
 
 (a) When a person or thing is compared with itself at different 
 times or places or under different circumstances. 
 
 () When objects are. compared which do not belong to the 
 same class. 
 
 iet tft bet @ee lief, here the lake is deep. 
 
 ier ift bet @ee am lief [ten, here the lake is deepest. 
 
 6r fiifylt fid) fdjroad), he feels weak. 
 
 6r fill) It fid) fyeute am fd)ttwd)ften, he feels weakest to-day. 
 
 ie ^Pflaume ift grofc, bie 33irne nod) grower, abet bet Slpfel ift am 
 
 grbjsten, the plum is large, the pear larger, but the apple is the 
 
 largest : ; but notice 
 2>er 2lpfel ift gro^, bicfcr nod) grower, abet jener ift ber grofste, that 
 
 apple is large, this one is larger, but that one is the largest. 
 
 107. The absolute superlative is used to express a very high, or 
 the highest, degree without making a comparison, as liebfter SSater ! 
 dearest father-, befte 2Bare u billtgften ^reifen ! best goods at the lowest 
 prices. It may be expressed by the superlative alone or by the 
 superlative strengthened by after, as afterliebfte3 Stnb, dearest child, 
 but more frequently it is expressed by using in connection with the 
 positive form of the adjective a word which has the general mean- 
 ing of very, as fefyr, fyod)ft, du^etft, riefig; for example, fybd)ft tnter= 
 effant, very interesting-, aujjerft angenefym, extremely agreeable. 
 
THE ADVERB 33 
 
 108. Declension. Comparatives and superlatives follow the reg- 
 ular adjective declension. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 dlterer 3Kann ber altere 3ftann mein alteftcS Sinb 
 
 dlteren 5Ranne be3 dlteren 9Jtanne3 metneS dlteften $inbe3 
 
 dlterem SRanne bem dlteren SRanne meinem dlteften $inbe 
 
 dlteren SRann ben dlteren 5Rann mein altefteS Sinb 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 altere banner bie dlteren Planner meine dlteften Sinber 
 
 dlterer banner ber dlteren Scanner meiner dlteften Sinber 
 
 dlteren -JJZdrinern ben dlteren SDtdnnern meinen dlteften ffinbern 
 
 altere SUfdnner bie dlteren banner meine dlteften Sinber 
 
 109. Vowel mutation. A few very common monosyllabic adjec- 
 tives mutate the root vowel in the comparative and superlative. 
 
 alt grob fyod) Hug lang fdjroarg sometimes also bang, 
 arg groft jung franl nafy ftar! bumm, rot, and a 
 
 arm fyart fait furg fd^arf roarm few others 
 
 j 
 
 THE ADVERB 
 
 110. Comparison of adverbs. Adverbs are compared as follows : 
 beautifully frfjon fcpner am fd^onften aufs fd^onfte 
 easily leid^t leister am leicfyteften auf leid^tefte 
 near nal) naljer am ndd^ften auf^ nddjfte 
 often oft ofter am bfteften auf bftefte 
 
 111. Adverbs form their comparative like adjectives. The super- 
 lative is generally expressed by a dative or an accusative phrase 
 which may be called respectively the relative and the absolute 
 superlative of adverbs (105, 107). The relative superlative of an 
 adverb, however, must not be confused with the am form of the 
 adjective (106, 2). Decide in each case whether the corresponding 
 positive form is an adjective or an adverb. The adverbial superla- 
 tive without a preposition occurs in only a few cases (116). 
 
34 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 112. The relative superlative of an adverb expresses the rela- 
 tively highest degree attained by a person or thing when compared 
 with another person or thing, or with itself at different times 
 or places or under different circumstances. 
 
 Sari frf)reibt am fd)bnften t)on aft ben Snaben. 
 Of all the boys Carl writes the most beautifully. 
 
 Sutfe fingt immer frfjbn, aber fyeute fang fie am fcpnften. 
 Louise always sings beautifully, but to-day she sang more beautifully 
 than ever. 
 
 113. The absolute superlative of an adverb expresses a very high 
 degree without making a comparison. 
 
 6r empfing mid) auf freunblicfyfte. 
 He received me most cordially. 
 
 2)er SKenfd) ift auf nad)fte mit ben Sieren uerroanbt. (oet$e.) 
 Man is very closely related to the animals. 
 
 114. A number of adverbs are irregular in comparison. 
 
 gut beffer am beften balb efyer am efyeften 
 
 ffer am beften r roeniger am roentgften 
 
 . roofyler am roofylften L minber am minbeften 
 
 gern lieber am liebften mel mefyr am meiften 
 
 115. Notice the meaning of mel, fefyr, gern, lieber, and am Iteb- 
 ften in the following sentences : 
 
 @r fprirf)t mel, he talks much. 
 
 @r Itebt fie fe^r, he loves her very much. 
 
 6r trinlt gern SRildj, he likes milk. 
 
 @r trinft lieber See al Saffee, he prefers tea to coffee. 
 
 6r trinlt am liebften 5ftildj, he likes milk best of all. 
 
 116. Several absolute superlatives are formed irregularly, as 
 dufjerft, balbigft, ergebenft, freunblid)ft, gefdEigft, giitigft, fyerli<i)ft, 
 ^bd^ft, jiingft, Idngft, meift, minbeft, mbglid)ft, beftenS, erften^, britten^, 
 fruf)eften, ^od^)ften, meiftenS, minbeften^, roenigften^, nadjftenS. 
 
NUMERALS 35 
 
 NUMERALS 
 
 117. Cardinals. The cardinals are : 
 
 1 ein, 2 groei, 3 brei, 4 met, 5 fiinf, 6 fed)3, 7 fieben, 8 adfjt, 
 9 neun, 10 gefyn, 11 elf, 12 groblf, 13 breigefyn, 14 wergefyn, 15 fiinf- 
 gefyn, 16fe<i)geE)n, 17 fiebgefyn, 18 acfytgefyn, 19 neungefyn, 20 groangig, 
 21 einunbgrtmngig, 22 groeiunbgroangig, 30 breiftig, 40 tnergig, 50 
 fiinfgig, 60 fedjgig, 70 fiebgig, 80 arf)tgig, 90 neungig, 100 fyunbert, 
 1000 taufenb, 1,000,000 eine SKiHion. 
 
 118. The cardinals except etn are not declined. $wei and brei 
 sometimes form a genitive graeier, breier, and a dative groeien, 
 breien. 
 
 119. @in when used with a noun is either a numeral adjective 
 or the indefinite article. As a numeral adjective it is sometimes 
 printed with spaced letters or with a capital. It is declined like 
 the indefinite article, or when preceded by the definite article it is 
 declined like a weak adjective. 
 
 NOTE. For the use of etn as an indefinite pronoun see 162. 
 
 120. Ordinals. The ordinals from one to twenty are formed by 
 adding t to the cardinals and from twenty upwards by adding ft, as 
 bet tnerte, bet tnergefynte, ber gttwngigfte, bet brei^igfte, ber fiebgtgfte, 
 bet fyunbertfte. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. @rft, britt, fed^ft, ftebt (beside fie&ent), and ud)t. 
 
 121. The ordinals are declined like adjectives. 
 
 122. Words derived from numerals. 
 
 1. Nouns. They are formed by adding tel (derived from Xeil) to 
 the ordinals, as ein Srittel, ba SDritteL 
 
 2. Adjectives. These are formed from the cardinals by adding 
 facf), fdltig, erlei, and malig, as einfarf), tnerftiltig, breierlei, einmalig. 
 
 3. Adverbs. Ordinal adverbs are formed by adding mal to the 
 cardinals and en to the ordinals, as eintnal, erftenS ; groeimal, 
 groeitenS. 
 
36 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 PRONOUNS 
 
 123. Personal pronouns. 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 First Second Third First Second Third 
 
 Person Person Person Person Person Person 
 
 M. F. N. M. F. N. 
 
 NOM. id) bu er fie eg trnr ifyr fie 
 
 GEN. meiner beiner feiner ifyrer feiner unfer euer ifyrer Sfyrer 
 
 DAT. tnir bir ifym ifyr ifym ung eud) ifynen 3$nen 
 
 Ace. mid) bid) ifyn fie eg ung eud) fie ie 
 
 124. In poetry the genitives meiner, beiner, feiner are frequently 
 replaced by the older forms mein, bein, fein. 
 
 125. A personal pronoun referring to a preceding noun agrees 
 with it in gender and number. 
 
 2Bo ift mein ut ? aben @ie ifyn gefefyen ? 
 Where is my hat ? Have you seen it ? 
 
 126. Personal pronouns referring to neuter nouns which denote 
 persons, as bag grdulein, bag -IRabdjen, bag SBeib, generally follow 
 the natural gender. 
 
 2Bie Ijeifet bag 3Kabd)en ? @ie (or @s) ^ei^t SKarie. 
 What is the girPs name ? Her name is Marie. 
 
 127. The genitive singular of eg was formerly eg, and this form 
 still occurs in certain phrases, as : 
 
 @r ift eg roert. 
 He is worthy of it. 
 
 $d) bin eg miibe. 
 I am tired of it. 
 
 128. When things are referred to, the dative and the accusative 
 of the personal pronouns after a preposition are represented by the 
 adverb ba (bar before vowels). a (bar) is prefixed to the prep- 
 osition, and the resulting compound is an adverb. 
 
PRONOUNS 37 
 
 @r rouble mdf)t3 batxm. 
 
 He knew nothing of it or of them. 
 
 3$) bin bafiir. 
 
 I am in favor of it or of them. 
 
 ier ifi ein ifd). Segen 6ie ^fai 33urf) barauf. 
 /> a table. Lay your book upon it. 
 
 129. The genitive forms are compounded with roegen, tmflett, 
 and fyalben, and the r of the pronoun changes to t, as meinetroegen 
 from meiner 4- roegen ; likewise meinettmlien, euretfyalben, etc. 
 
 130. For the sake of emphasis the personal pronouns of the third 
 person are often replaced by the demonstrative ber, bie, ba (152). 
 
 3)en Sdcfer fenne id^ fefyr gut, abet ber E)ei^t cfymtbt unb nid^t 2Berner, 
 The baker 1 'know quite well, but his name is Schmidt and not Werner. 
 
 131. The pronouns of address bit, ifyr, and 
 
 1. <5ie is used where no great intimacy exists. It is plural in form 
 and takes its verb in the third person plural, but is used in address- 
 ing one person or more than one. It is always written with a 
 
 capital letter. 
 
 @te ftnb fletjstg. 
 
 You are industrious. 
 
 3$ fyabe Ste nid)t gefefyen. 
 I didn't see you. 
 
 6r roirb 3$nen gleirf) fyelfen. 
 He will help you immediately. 
 
 2. The singular bu and the plural tfyr are used in speaking to 
 near relatives, intimate friends, children, animals, and inanimate 
 objects. 2)u is also used in addressing God. 
 
 9Jiein ofyn, bu bift fefyr fletftig, my son, you are very industrious. 
 $<i) fyabe bid) nidfjt gefefyen, I did not see you. 
 ^inber, i^rmu^t je^tnad^ aufe tty\\, children, you must go home now. 
 Unfer SSater, ber bu bift in bem ^tmmel, our Father which art in heaven. 
 
38 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 132. Reflexive pronouns. There is but one distinctively reflexive 
 form, which is fid), self, an d it occurs only in the third person. The 
 other forms are supplied by the personal pronouns. The declension 
 is as follows : 
 
 NOM. 
 
 GEN. metner beiner feiner ifyrer tmfer euer ifyrer 3$ r e* 
 
 DAT. mir bit fid) fid) un3 eud) fid) fid) 
 
 Ace. mtdj bid) fid) fid) un3 eud^ fidf) fid) 
 
 NOTE i. Reflexive pronouns have no nominative (254). 
 NOTE 2. Illustrative sentences : 
 
 3d) fcfyone metner, I spare myself. 
 3d) fd)meid)le mir, I flatter myself. 
 3d) freue midj, I am glad. 
 @r freut ficl), he is glad. 
 greuen te ftcty ? Are you glad? 
 
 133. The indeclinable forms felbft and felber, self, are intensive 
 
 pronouns. 
 
 2Bir felbft (or feiber) finb ^ier. 
 
 We ourselves are here. 
 
 2)er ^rdfibent felbft (or felber) formte nid^t fommen. 
 The president himself could not come. 
 
 134. To avoid ambiguity in the plural, the reciprocal pronoun 
 eincmber is sometimes used instead of the reflexive. 3Bir lieben un3 
 may mean we love each other or we love ourselves ; whereas roir 
 lieben eirtanber can mean only we love each other. 
 
 135. The dative of the reflexive pronoun, in connection with the 
 definite article, is often used in German for the English possessive 
 adjective when the sense is clear, especially when referring to parts 
 of the body. 
 
 3$ fyabe mir ben 3lrm gebrodfjen. 
 I broke my arm. 
 
 @r fyat fid) in ben finger gejdjnitten. 
 He cut his finger. 
 
PRONOUNS 
 
 39 
 
 136. Possessive pronouns. The masculine nominative of the 
 
 possessive pronouns (except unf(e)rer,eu (e) ret) is like the genitive of 
 
 the corresponding personal pronouns (123). The personal pronouns 
 
 with their corresponding possessives in all' genders are as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 tdj 
 bu 
 er 
 fie 
 
 meiner 
 
 beiner 
 
 feiner 
 
 ifyrer 
 
 feiner 
 
 meine 
 
 beine 
 
 feine 
 
 ifyre 
 
 feine 
 
 tt)ir 
 
 fie 
 
 <5ie 
 
 unf(e)rer unf(e)re unf(e)re 
 eu(e)rer eu(e)re eu(e)re 
 ifyrer ifyre 
 
 meine 
 
 beineg 
 
 feineg 
 
 ifyreS 
 
 feineS 
 
 137. The possessive pronouns may be preceded by the definite 
 article, and meiner, meine, meineS then become ber meine, bie meine, 
 ba3 meine. There is also a form in ig which is never used without 
 the definite article : ber meinige, bie meinige, ba3 meinige. Notice 
 the possessive pronouns in the following sentences : 2Bo ifi $E)r (89) 
 ut ? meiner (ber meine, ber meinige) ift fyier, where is your hat ? 
 mine is here ; eben Sne mir 3$ren (89) SaH bitte, id) fyabe meinen 
 (ben meinen, ben meinigen) t)erloren,^'^ me your ball, please, I have 
 lost mine. Without the definite article the possessive pronouns are 
 declined like limiting adjectives (82) ; with the definite article they 
 are declined like qualifying adjectives. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 M. 
 
 ber meine 
 be3 meinen 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 meiner meine meineS 
 meineS meiner meineS 
 meinem meiner meinem 
 meinen meine meineS 
 PLURAL 
 
 M.F. N. 
 
 meine 
 meiner 
 meinen 
 meine 
 
 N. 
 
 ba meine 
 
 SINGULAR 
 F. 
 
 bie meine 
 
 ber meinen be meinen 
 bem meinen ber meinen bem meinen 
 ben meinen bie meine hen meinen 
 PLURAL 
 
 M. F.N. 
 
 , bie meinen 
 ber meinen 
 ben meinen 
 bie meinen 
 
40 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 138. In the predicate the possessive pronoun expresses either 
 mere ownership or identity of ownership. In the first case the pro- 
 noun is uninflected and emphasizes the idea of possession, whereas 
 in the second it is inflected and emphasizes the idea of identity. 
 Notice the following examples : 
 
 1. Of ownership. 
 
 2)er ut I r the hat i 
 
 ie $eber \ ift mein, \ the pen \ is mine. 
 
 SDag SBudf) J [the book J 
 
 2Bag metn ift, ift aucf) bein, what is mine is also thine. 
 
 3)ag ift aHeg metn, that is all mine. 
 
 enn bein ift bte $raft, for thine is the power. 
 
 SBag euer ift, foE euer bleiben, what is yours shall remain yours. 
 
 NOTE. The forms tfyr, her, tfyr, their, and 3^r, your, are always inflected 
 when used in the predicate. 
 
 2)a3 Slid) ift if)re3 (bag tljre, bag i^rige). . 
 
 The book is hers or theirs. 
 
 2)a3 Sud) ift3E)reg (bag 3^re, bag S^rige). 
 
 The book is yours. 
 
 2. Of identity. 
 
 2)ein 28iHe ift aud^ bet meine (ber meinige, meiner). 
 Your will is also mine. 
 
 ein Sog rourbe aud^ bag unfere (bag unfrige, unfereg). 
 His fate became ours too. 
 
 139. The personal pronouns er, fie, and eg, used as subject, are 
 followed in the predicate by the uninflected possessive, and the in- 
 definite pronoun eg (157) by the inflected possessive. 
 
 28em (141) gefybrt biefer ut? 6r ift metn. 
 JBem ge^ort biefe geber? @ie ift mein. 
 2Bem ge^ort bief^g 33ud^ ? @g ift mein. 
 
 (this hat 1 
 this pen \ belong ? It is mine, 
 this book ] 
 
PRONOUNS 41 
 
 2Bem gefybrt biefer ut? @3 ift meiner (ber meine, ber meinige). 
 2Bem gefybrt biefe $eber ? @3 ift meine (bie meine, bie meinige). 
 JBem gefybrt biefe^ Sud^ ? @3 ift rneine^ (ba meine, ba meinige). 
 r Mw /^^/ i 
 
 To whom does < this pen \ belong ? It is mine. 
 \ .,* ,__v| 
 
 140. The possessive pronouns with the definite article are often 
 used as nouns, the plural referring to one's relatives or party asso- 
 ciates, the neuter singular to one's property or duty. 
 
 3d) liebe bie SReinen, Hove my people. 
 
 2)ie uerbunbeten g-elbfyerren fafyen roie bie $f)tigen furs SSaterlanb 
 
 fdmpften, the allied generals saw how their soldiers were fighting 
 
 for their country. 
 
 Gr Derlor ba3 (Seine, he lost his property. 
 Gr ^at ba einige geian, he has done his duty. 
 
 141. Interrogative pronouns. The interrogative pronouns are 
 toer, who ; nm3, what ; raeld^er (97), which one ; and n)a fiir einer, 
 what kind. They are declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL MASCULINE 
 
 roer roa roelcfyer rceldje n>elc^e roeld^e roag fiir einer 
 
 roeffen roeffen n>eld^e roelcfyer raeld^e^ raeld^er roa fiir eine3 
 
 went roeld^em raeld^er roeldfjem raeld^en n)a fiir einem 
 
 wen roa raeld^en raeld^e raeldje^ raeld^e roa fiir einen 
 
 142. 28er is both masculine and feminine, singular and plural, 
 and refers to persons. 2Ba is neuter and refers to things. 28er 
 and Ttw3 can never be used as interrogative adjectives. 
 
 28 er roar e3 ? Who was it ? 
 
 2Beld)er raar bag ? Which one was that ? 
 
 28c$ roollen @ie ? F"/to do you wish ? 
 
 3$ l)abe einen fd^raarjen ut. 2Ba fiir einen {)aben te ? / /^z'<? 
 
 ^ tor^ hat. What kind have you ? 
 ier finb groei JHofen. -JBeldje raoHen ie? Z^r^ ^r^ two roses. 
 
 Which one do you wish ? 
 
42 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 143. The dative of tofl3 is often supplied by the adverb tt)0 (root 
 before vowels) plus a preposition, as tx)orau3, roobei, tDOtnit, tt)0t)on, 
 n)0u, roonad). The accusative admits of the same substitution, as 
 rooburd), roofur, roogegen. The tendency at present is to use roaS 
 in all cases, as roegen ttw3, mit txw3, um trm3, etc. 
 
 NOTE. For the use'of : 
 
 1. 3Bet, Tt)a3, and roelcfyer as relative pronouns see 145-148. 
 
 2. 2Ber and roelcf) as indefinite pronouns see 163. 
 
 3. SBelcfyer and wa% fur ein as inf Adjectives see 97. 
 
 144. Relative pronouns. The r^ i ^ronouns are ber, bie, ba ; 
 roeldjer, roeldje, roeldje^ ; and sometimes roer and wa%. The former 
 are definite relatives and the latter indefinite. 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 bet bie bag bie roeldjer roeldje raeld^eS trjeldje 
 
 befjen beren befjen beren befjen beren befjen beren 
 
 bent ber bem benen njeld^em raeld^er roeldjem tDeld^eti 
 
 ben bie ba bie roelcfyen n)eld>e raeld^e^ raeld^e 
 
 145. SBelrfjer as a relative pronoun uses the genitive of bet. Its 
 own genitive, singular n)eld)e3, roelrf)er, roeldjeS, plural roeld^er, occurs 
 very rarely and never stands before the noun upon which it depends. 
 
 2)ie tabt, beren 3Kauer (never roeldfjer 5Rauer) nod) ftefyt, l)ei^t 
 
 SRotljenburg. 
 The city whose walls are still standing is called Rothenburg. 
 
 ie Waiter, innerfyalb beren (or raeld^er) bie 2Utftabt liegt, rourbe 
 
 or 3>af)rfyunberten erbaut. 
 The wall which surrounds the old part of the city was built centuries ago. 
 
 146. When the relative pronoun refers to things its dative and 
 accusative after a preposition are often replaced by the adverb roo 
 (roor) plus a preposition. 
 
 a Sudf), rootton (t)on bem, won roeldjem) id) fpredje, ift fefyr alt. 
 
 The book of which I am speaking is very old. 
 
 2)a3 ifi ber s $unft roorum (um ben, um roeld^en) e3 fid^ 
 
 That is the point in question. 
 
PRONOUNS 43 
 
 147. 293cr as a relative pronoun means he who, whoever. It 
 always includes its antecedent, which, however, is sometimes em- 
 phasized by the demonstrative pronoun bet. 
 
 2Cer nirfjt fyoren null, muf; fiifylen. 
 He who will not hear must feel. 
 
 SSer fdjltift, bet fimbigt nid)t. 
 He who sleeps sins not. 
 
 2)er -JJtann, ben < ~\) id) faf), war beuifdj. 
 
 The man whom j,s a German. 
 
 148. 2Bd$ as a relative pronoun means that which, whatever. 
 It is an indefinite neuter relative, and is used more extensively 
 than roer. 28a3 may include its antecedent, or its antecedent may 
 be a neuter personal, demonstrative, or indefinite pronoun, as 
 e, ba, aHe, etroaS, nid)t3, a neuter noun of indefinite meaning 
 (especially a superlative used as a noun), or a whole clause. 
 
 5Ba fid) liebt, necft fid). 
 Lovers tease each other. 
 
 2Ba3 mid) auf btefer SBelt betrubt, bag nmfyret furge 3^t, 
 2Ba abet meine 6eele liebt, ba bleibt in (Sroigfeit. 
 The trials of this world are of short duration, 
 But that which satisfies my soul is eternal. 
 
 @r bat mid) u fdjreiben, roa id^ aud) tat. 
 He asked me to write, which I did. 
 
 NOTE i. If the antecedent is in a different case from roer or roa3, it must 
 be expressed by a demonstrative. 
 
 SBer liigt, bem glcwbt man nidjt. 
 One does not believe him who lies. 
 2Ba3 roaljr^aft tft, bem benfet nad^. 
 Think on those things which are true. 
 
 NOTE 2. The words and), immer, aud) immer, nur, autf) nur are frequently 
 used with roer and raa^ as relatives and thus make their meaning more 
 
 general - 3Ber er auc^ fei. 
 
 Whoever he may be. 
 
44 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 149. In a relative clause the inflected verb comes last. 
 
 ag 33urf), bag auf bem Xifrfje Itegt, ift eine rammatif. 
 The book which lies on the table is a grammar. 
 
 3$ fyabe bag Surf) gefunben, bag @te aerloren fatten. 
 I found the book which you had lost. 
 
 150. A personal pronoun of the first or second person, used as 
 antecedent of the relative bet, bie, bag, is often repeated after the 
 relative. If it is not repeated, the verb is in the third person. 
 
 2Btr, bie nrir bie emfen jagen, nrifjen bag, we who hunt the chamois 
 
 know that. 
 3$), bet trf) 3fyr greunb bin, traue Sfynen, I who am your friend 
 
 trust you. 
 2)u, ber bu metn greunb btft, txrirft mtr fyelfen, you who are my 
 
 friend will help me. 
 33eracfyteft bu fo beinen $atfer, Sell, unb mid^, ber fyier an fetner 
 
 tatt gebtetet ? Do you thus despise your emperor, Tell, and 
 
 me who rules here in his stead? 
 
 151. In German a relative clause is always set off by commas. 
 See sentences above. 
 
 152. Demonstrative pronouns. The demonstrative pronouns are 
 bet, biefer, jener, berfelbe, berjemge, folder, folrf) etner, etn folder, 
 and fo etner (91). 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 ber bte bag bie fold) etner etn foldjer foldje 
 
 beflen beren befjen beren, berer fold) etneg etneg folrfjen folder 
 bem ber bem benen fold) etnem etnemfold^en folrfjen 
 
 ben bte bag bte folrf) etnen etnen fol^en jold^e 
 
 NOTE.' For the declension of biefer, berfelbe, berjenige, and folder, see 91. 
 
 153. The demonstrative pronoun ber is declined like the relative 
 ber, except that it has two forms in the genitive plural, beren and 
 berer. The form berer usually refers to persons. 
 
PRONOUNS 45 
 
 @r gebadjte berer, bie in 3Rot roaren. 
 
 He was mindful of those who were in distress. 
 
 @ie erinnert fid) gern ifyrer greunbinnen, befonberS berer au ifyrer 
 
 djuljeit. 
 She enjoys recalling her friends, especially those of her school days. 
 
 <5ie erinnert fid) gern ijrer_@rlebniffe, befonberS beren au3 tfyrer 
 
 She enjoys recalling her experiences, especially those of her school days. 
 
 154. The genitive of the demonstrative pronoun refers to an 
 oblique case in a sentence, while the possessive adjective refers to 
 the subject. 
 
 2)er raf fyat biefem 9Jtanne unb beffen ofyne afleS anwertraut. 
 The count has intrusted everything to this man and to his (the man's) 
 
 2)er raf fyat biefem 3Kanne unb fetnetn o^ne atte ant)ertraut. 
 The count has intrusted everything to this man and his (the count's) son. 
 
 155. The neuter nominative and accusative form biefeg often 
 omits its ending e3 and becomes bte. 
 
 156. old) may precede the indefinite article and is then not 
 declined (see 96) : nom. fold) etner ; gen. fold) etne3. 
 
 157. The demonstrative pronouns ba and bte3, the indefinite 
 e3, and the interrogative roeld)e3 are used with the verb fetn and a 
 predicate noun of any gender and number to express identity of the 
 subject and predicate. The predicate noun governs the verb. 
 
 ftnb Sitter, those are books. 
 tft eine Sofe, this is a rose. 
 finb Spfel, they are apples. 
 
 finb bie fcpnften Slutnen ? Which are the most beautiful 
 flowers ? 
 
 NOTE. For the demonstrative ber, bie, ba3 used for the personal pro- 
 nouns see 130. 
 
46 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 158. The former is expressed by jener and the latter by btefer. 
 
 err dfjmibt unb err 33run finb 3?acf)barn; biefer i[t reidfj, jener 
 
 arm. 
 Mr. Schmidt and Mr. Bruns are neighbors ; the former {Mr. S.) is 
 
 poor, the latter (Mr. B^) rich. 
 
 159. The dative and the accusative of bte and ba$ after a prepo- 
 sition are often replaced by tyier or ba plus a preposition (cf. 128). 
 
 SDdDon roeifc idf) nidf)t3. 
 Of that I know nothing. 
 
 agu bin tdj nod) nidfjt berett. 
 I am not ready for that yet. 
 
 ierin ftimmten fie nid^t iiberein. 
 In this they did not agree. 
 
 160. The idea of nearness or remoteness is emphasized by using 
 the adverbs fyier, ba, or bort in connection with the demonstratives. 
 
 SDtefer 9Kann fyier ift reidfjer ate jener bort. 
 This man here is richer than that one yonder. 
 
 161. Indefinite pronouns. The indefinite pronouns are man, one ; 
 jemanb, somebody ; niemanb, nobody ; jebermann, everybody ; etroa, 
 some, something \ and nid^t, nothing. They are declined as follows : 
 
 man jemanb jeberman 
 
 eine jemanb^ jebermanng 
 
 einem jemanb(em) jebermann 
 
 einen jemanb(en) jebermann 
 
 NOTE. Niemanb is declined like jemanb. @ttt)a3, sometimes contracted 
 to ttm3, and md)t^ are indeclinable. Notice also that the oblique cases of 
 man are replaced by eitt-. 
 
 162. The following indefinite adjectives are used also as indef- 
 inite pronouns. In the singular : einer, irgenb einer ; in both sin- 
 gular and plural : jeber, jebroeber, jeglicfyer, and f einer ; in the plural 
 
PREPOSITIONS 47 
 
 only : atte, cmbere, beibe, einige, etlidje, manege, mefyre, tnefyrere, t)iele, 
 and roenige. Of these the following may be preceded : 
 
 1. By the definite article: bet anbere, bie beiben, ber eine, ber 
 jebe, ber jebroebe, ber jeglidje. 
 
 2. By the indefinite article : ein anberer, ein jeber, ein jeglidfjer, 
 ein manner, and ein mefyrereS. 
 
 NOTE. The words given in the preceding paragraph are declined like 
 adjectives. 
 
 163. The interrogatives roer and roeldj may be used as indefinite 
 pronouns. They are then frequently accompanied by irgenb : 
 
 @r roifl un3 roelrfje geben. 
 He wants to give us some. 
 
 %tf) fyabe letn elb. aben @te 
 I have no money. Have you some? 
 
 63 muf$ mir irgenb n>er etraa^ leifyen. 
 Somebody must loan me some. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS 
 
 NOTE. Only those prepositions which are of frequent occurrence are 
 given in the following lists. 
 
 164. Prepositions which govern the genitive are : 
 
 rodfyrenb, during bieSfeit, this side of um . . . roiEen,/^ 
 
 roegen, on account of jenfeit, the other side of the sake of 
 
 ftutt, 'i . - innerhalb, within 
 
 V instead of 
 anftatt, J aufterfyalb, outside of 
 
 iro^, in spite of unterfyalb, below 
 
 oberfyalb, above 
 
 NOTE i. SBegett sometimes follows the word which it governs. For 
 meinetroegen etc. see 129. 
 
 NOTE 2. Slnftatt and ftatt govern also an infinitive, as anftatt JU gefjor- 
 djen, instead of obeying. 
 
48 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 165. Prepositions which govern the dative are : 
 
 au3, out of nad), towards, to, after, gegenitber, opposite 
 
 auj$er, outside of, according to nad)ft, next to 
 
 except feit, since, for nebft, besides 
 
 bei, by, with, at the non, of, from, by famt, together with 
 
 house of u, to guttnbet, contrary to 
 
 nut, with entgegen, against 
 
 166 When nadfj means according to, it follows its noun : -JReiner 
 URetnung nad) irren @ie fidfj, according to my opinion you are mis- 
 taken. Observe also the difference between nad) bem aufe, nadf) 
 >aufe, and gu aufe : $d) gefye n'ad) bem aufe, I am going to the 
 house ; ,^d) gefye nad^ mufe, / am going home ; 3>d() bin u aufe, 
 7^7^ at home. Also note the difference between icfy gefye nad) ifym, 
 I am going after him (that is, to get him), and id) gel)e gu il)m, /<^w 
 going to see him, I am going to his house. The present tense of a 
 verb accompanied by the dative after feit is used to express an 
 action or a state which began in the past and still continues in the 
 present : (St tft fd)on feit etner 2Bod)e franf, he has been sick for a 
 week ;. 2Btr n>ofynen feit bem erften 9Jtai in unferem neuen aufe, we 
 have been living in our new house since the first of May. 
 
 167. Prepositions which govern the accusative are : 
 
 bt, up to gegen, against tmber, against 
 
 burd), through ofyne, without entlang, along 
 
 \\\\ f for um, about, around 
 
 NOTE. Dfyne and um are followed also by an infinitive, as ofyne tfjn 
 , without seeing him ; lim IlltJ JU jetn, to be brief. 
 
 168. Prepositions which govern both the dative and the accu- 
 sative are : 
 
 an, at, to, by in, in, into, to unter, under 
 
 auf, on, upon, for neben, beside or, before, ago 
 
 fyinter, behind iiber, above, across nnfd)en, between, among 
 
PREPOSITIONS 49 
 
 169. The prepositions of the preceding paragraph govern the 
 dative in expressions : 
 
 1. Of place where, in which. 
 
 2. Of time when. 
 
 3)ie ^inber finb auf bem ad), the children are on the roof. 
 
 2)ie ^inber laufen in bem arten, the children are running in the 
 
 garden. 
 $ri gefyt am onnabenb immer nadj aufe, Fred always goes home 
 
 on Saturday. 
 
 SSor einer 2Bod)e roar idj u aufe, a week ago I was at home. 
 3jm 3>uni fd)lief$t bie <5d)ule, ^^/ closes in June. 
 
 170. The prepositions given under paragraph 168 govern the 
 accusative in expressions : 
 
 1. Of place where to, towards, or into which. 
 
 2. Of time how long, until when. 
 
 te Sinber laufen in ben arten. 
 
 The children are running into the garden. 
 
 gri cjefyt nur auf einen Xag nadfj aufe. 
 Fred is going home only for a day. 
 
 eute iiber einen SRonat roerben tx)ir in 33erlin fein. 
 A month from to-day we shall be in Berlin. 
 
 171. In abstract expressions where the idea of motion or of 
 place does not appear an, in, unter, and t)or take the dative, auf 
 and iiber the accusative. 
 
 Sin ifyren $riirf)ten foHt ifyr fie erfennen. 
 By their fruits ye shall know them. 
 
 3jn bet infidjt fyaben 6ie red^t. 
 In that respect you are right. 
 
 3$ freue mid) iiber meine Hlaffe. 
 I am delighted with my class. 
 
50 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 172. The following examples may serve to illustrate more fully 
 the use of the prepositions which govern both the dative and the 
 accusative. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE DATIVE 
 
 3$ lege bag 33ud() auf ben Sifdj. SDag 33ud() Kegt auf bem 23fd&. 
 
 I lay the book on the table. The book lies on the table. 
 
 3d) gel)e in bag ftimrtm. 3$ gefye in bem 3tmmer auf unb ab. 
 
 / # #2 going into the room . 1 am walking to and fro in the room. 
 
 3d) gelje fyinter bag aug. 3$ 9^ fyinter bem aufe. 
 
 I am going behind the house. I am walking behind the house. 
 
 3d) gefje an bie Stir. 3$ &in cin ber ur. 
 
 ./#; ^ztfflg 1 ^ ^ d&w. /^w ^/ M^ door. 
 
 3d) fd^reibe ben a^ an bie Safcl. er a| ftc^t an ber Safcl. 
 /^zw writing the sentence on the The sentence is on the board. 
 board. 
 
 35a3 Jltnb fefcte fid^ neben fie. 2)a Sinb fa^ neben tyr. 
 7%^ r^/7(/ J^/ down beside her. The child sat beside her. 
 
 SDie 6i^ung bauerte bi fpat in 2Bir famen fpat in ber 9Jad)t nadlj 
 
 bie S^ad^t. aufe. 
 
 The sessionlasted far into the night. We came home late at night. 
 
 liber ben ^hinft fagte er nidjt. 5Jtid) graut t)or ber ^riiftmg. 
 He didn't say anything concern- I dread the examination. 
 ing that point. 
 
 173. The definite article often contracts with a preposition. 
 
 an bem = am gegen ba = gegenS iiber bag 
 
 an ba = an ^inter bem = Ijinterm urn bag 
 
 auf bag = aufg fyinter bag = fyinterg unter bem = unterm 
 
 au^er bem = au^erm in bem = im unter bag = unterg 
 
 bei bem = beim in bag = ing t)on bem t)om 
 
 burd^ bag = burd^g iiber bem = iiberm u bem = gum 
 
 fiir bag = furg iiber ben = iibern gu ber = gur 
 
CONJUNCTIONS 51 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 174. Conjunctions are of two kinds, coordinate and subordinate. 
 Coordinate conjunctions connect elements of the same kind or 
 rank. Subordinate conjunctions connect elements of unequal rank. 
 
 175. Coordinate conjunctions. Some of the most common pure 
 coordinate conjunctions are : 
 
 i. Simple 2. Correlative 
 
 unb, and ebenfo . . . rote, both . . . and 
 
 abet, but nicfet nur . . . fonbern aud), ") 
 
 , \not only . . . but also 
 alletn, but, yet md)t auem . . . fonbern aud), J 
 
 fonbern, but foroof)! . . . al$ (or aud)), as well . . . as, both . . . and 
 benn,y^ entroeber . . . ober, either . . . or 
 
 ober, or roeber . . . nod), neither . . . nor 
 
 176. The above conjunctions do not affect the position of the 
 verb, ntroeber . . . ober, however, may take either the natural 
 or the inverted order : Gntroeber er ift nidjt flei^ig ober er ift butnm, 
 or gntroeber tft er nid)t fleifcig ober er ift (or tft er) bumm, he is 
 either lazy or stupid. 
 
 177. 9l6ct is used after negative as well as affirmative statements. 
 It qualifies the preceding statement, but does not contradict it. 
 
 Gr tft begabt, aber faul. 
 He is talented, but lazy. 
 
 <5te tft nid)t fyiibfd), aber fie ift gut. 
 She is not pretty, but she is good. 
 
 6r lam nidjt, aber er blieb nid)t ofyne tunb u aufe. 
 He didrft come, but he had reason for remaining at home. 
 
 178. Sonbent contradicts, and is used only after a negative. 
 
 @r ift nidjt reid), fonbern arm. 
 He is not rich, but poor. 
 
 6r fyat ba au3 nidjt gemietet, fonbern er fyat e3 gelauft. 
 He did not rent the house, but he bought it. 
 
52 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 179. Stttctn is used very little. It admits the preceding state- 
 ment, but introduces some limitation. 
 
 )te S3lume ift fdjon, allein fie buftet nicfyt. 
 The flower is beautiful, but it is not fragrant. 
 
 2)a3 gfeft t)erltef prddjtig, aHetn e3 bauerte gu lange. 
 The festivity was a great success, but it lasted too long. 
 
 180. Adverbial coordinate conjunctions generally cause inversion 
 (293). Some of the most common are : 
 
 1. Additive. 
 
 audf), also \&vfo\& , furthermore 
 
 auf$erbem, besides bergletdjen, likewise 
 
 bagu, besides wmt\\i\\ , particularly 
 
 ubem, moreover befonberS, especially 
 
 2. Partitive. 
 
 tetl3 . . . teil, partly . . . partly 
 
 eineStetlfo . . . anbernteil^, 1 on the one hand . . . on the 
 
 einerfett3 . . . anberfettg, ] other hand 
 
 3. Adversative or restrictive. 
 
 fytngegen, 1 ilbrigen^, moreover 
 
 bafjingegen, \-on the contrary tro^bem, in spite of that 
 
 bagegen, J inbeffen, meanwhile 
 
 glei<i)tt)0l)l, ^ beffenungead^tet, notwith- 
 
 standing 
 
 groat, 
 bod), 
 
 however, never- 
 
 ,, , fogar, even 
 
 theless 
 
 fonft, 
 
 anbernfaU^, 
 
 otherwise 
 
 md)t3beftott)emger, nevertheless tneltnefyr, but rather 
 
 4. Ordinal. 
 
 "?'. \fint Jann,/^ 8 Ie|t, | 
 
 erftenS, J ferner, further 
 
 gtt)eiten, second barauf, thereupon balb . . . balb, now 
 
 S, third, etc. . . . now 
 
CONJUNCTIONS 53 
 
 5. Illative. 
 
 alfo, so bann, then folqlicfo, 1 
 
 , ' , ' 8 ^consequently 
 
 barum, 7 - raeut(D>&fe.ttm fomtt, j 
 
 I therefore, on 
 
 - - 
 
 , 
 
 beshalb, J- 7 nun, ^w, conse- bemnadb,^ .. . 
 
 \thataccount P , \accordingly 
 
 be^roegen, j quently jonadl), ) 
 
 bafyer, hence fo, so 
 
 NOTE. An illative conjunction joins an inference or a conclusion to a 
 preceding clause. 
 
 181. Subordinate conjunctions. Subordinate conjunctions con- 
 nect dependent with principal clauses. The verb in a dependent 
 clause stands at the end. For exceptions see 295-297. 
 
 182. The following list contains only the most important sub- 
 ordinate conjunctions : 
 
 al3, as, when nacfybem, after ' ttwtttt, when 
 
 al3 ob, ^asif, jenadjbem, according as roeil, because 
 al3tt)enn,J as though ob, whether roenri, if, when 
 
 bet)or, before obgleid),! roenn audj, "1 
 
 big, until obfdbon, \although raenn aleid), \ 
 
 * I /^ */ 
 ba, j, ^. VKCO obtool)!, j ruenn fd^on, j 
 
 ii, in order that \t\i, since (of time) rcarum 
 
 ^ 
 
 * j , r r , r= > . 
 
 ecje, ^w fobalb al, J rt)te, 
 
 bafe, M^/ fobalb, ^ roeSbalb 
 
 ' ' 
 
 , "1 
 b/j y 
 
 falls, ^ ^^ M^/ fooft, l n)o, 
 
 I ' ' >as often as 
 tnbem, i ,., fooytal,j roofer, whence 
 
 tnbefjen, / roci^renb, while wo^in, whither 
 
 ' i . 2Bcmn in direct or indirect questions. 
 2 . 3lfe in referring to one occasion in past time. 
 
 TTru f^ n re ^ errm g to the present -and the 
 
 wnen = ^ 
 
 future. 
 
 . - . 
 
 in referring to repeated or customary 
 
 action in the past. 
 
54 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 * 
 
 184. UBatttt is used only in direct or indirect questions 
 
 2Bann ttrirb ber Slr^t lommen ? 
 When will the doctor come ? 
 
 $>d() tt)etf$ ntd)t, nwnn er lommt. 
 / do not know when he will come. 
 
 185. 211$ as a temporal conjunction refers to one occasion in 
 
 3$ roadjte auf, a(3 bie Ufyr fed) fdjlug. 
 I awoke when the clock struck six. 
 
 @r roar fdjon fyier, al icf) fam. 
 Z^ was here when I came. 
 
 2113 id) i^n fat), bad^te id) an 6te. 
 When I saw him I thought of you. 
 
 186. SBetttt as a temporal conjunction refers to the present or 
 the future in all circumstances, but to the past only in case of 
 customary or repeated action. It cannot be used in a question. 
 
 S)ic Slumen bliifyen, roenn e3 grufyjafyr rairb. 
 The flowers bloom when spring comes. 
 
 @r roirb lommen, raenn e gu fpat ift. 
 He will come when it is too late. 
 
 $ri lam tmmet, n>enn bie tunbe j($on angefangen ^atte. 
 Fred always came when the lesson had begun. 
 
 2Benn idf) ifyn faf), bad)te id^ an ie. 
 Whenever I saw him I thought of you. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS 
 
 187. Interjections are used to express sudden emotion, a feeling 
 of surprise, or a command. 
 
 188. When an interjection is used in connection with the names 
 of the Deity the expression must not be translated literally. This 
 would be misinterpreting the meaning of the German phrase. 
 
A. Form -{ 
 
 VERBS 55 
 
 VERBS 
 
 189. The verb in German bears a strong resemblance to the verb 
 in English. It has two voices, the active and the passive ; four 
 moods, the indicative, subjunctive, imperative, and conditional ; six 
 tenses, the present, imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, future, and 
 future perfect ; three persons, first, second, and third ; two numbers, 
 singular and plural ; and two kinds of verbal substantives, the in- 
 finitives and participles. 
 
 190. Notice the following outline of the verb as to form and 
 meaning : 
 
 ' i. weak : loben (224). 
 
 2. strong: frf)lagen (231). 
 
 3. irregular weak: brennen (230). 
 
 f (a) of tense : fyaben, fetn, roerben (221- 
 
 I 223). 
 
 1 (b) of mood : biirfen, Ibnnen, mogen, 
 miiffen, foflen, rooHen (267). 
 
 r i. transitive: loben, fdjlaqen (196). 
 B. Meaning <( 
 
 I 2. intransitive: fallen, leben. 
 
 191. No verb can be conjugated without the aid of the auxiliary 
 verbs of tense, but the auxiliaries themselves may be used independ- 
 ently of other verbs. 
 
 192. A verb may be conjugated with the auxiliary verbs of mood 
 to express ability, necessity, and the like. 
 
 193. Weak verbs in German correspond to regular verbs in 
 English. The imperfect ends in te or ete, the tense sign of weak 
 verbs, and the past participle in t or et. The stem vowel never 
 changes 
 
 loben, lobte, gelobt, to praise 
 reben, rebete, gerebet, to speak 
 rubern, ruberte, gerubert, to row 
 fycmbeln, fycmbelte, gefyanbelt, to act 
 
56 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 194. Strong verbs in German correspond to irregular verbs in 
 English. In the imperfect the stem vowel changes and there is no 
 ending to indicate tense. The past participle ends in en. 
 
 fatten, ftel, gef alien, to fall 
 frf)lagen, frf)lug, gefdjlagen, to strike 
 
 195. Irregular weak verbs have the characteristics of both strong 
 and weak verbs. They have vowel change and add the tense sign 
 ie in the imperfect, as brennen, brannte, gebrannt, to burn. 
 
 196. Only transitive verbs have voice the active and the 
 passive (260). In the active voice the subject is acting, in the passive 
 voice the subject is acted upon. 
 
 3<$ lobe ben 3Utonn. 
 I am praising the man. 
 
 3$ roerbe gelobt. 
 I am being praised. 
 
 197. The principal parts of a verb are the present infinitive, the 
 first person of the imperfect indicative, and the past participle. It 
 is of the greatest importance to learn the .principal parts of every 
 verb and how they are applied in the conjugation. Examples : 
 loben, lobte, gelobt ; fcfylagen, fd)lug, gefcfylagen. 
 
 198. The present infinitive of most German verbs ends in en. 
 Exceptions : fein, iun, and verbs in eln and ern, as fycmbeln, to act, 
 and rubern, to row. 
 
 199. The perfect infinitive is composed of the past participle of 
 the verb to be conjugated and the present infinitive of its auxiliary 
 
 haben or fein. . , 
 
 gelobt fyaben, to have praised 
 
 gelommen fein, to have come 
 
 200. The stem of a verb. 
 
 1. The present stem is found by dropping the ending en (n after 
 el and er) of the infinitive. 
 
 2. The imperfect stem is the second member of the principal parts. 
 
VERBS 57 
 
 201. The present participle is formed by adding b to the present 
 infinitive, as lobenb, jefyenb. Exceptions : feienb and tuenb, whose 
 infinitives are respectively feitt and tun. 
 
 202. The gerundive, or future passive participle, in German is 
 formed by using u with the present participle. 
 
 3)er gu nerefyrenbe 9Kann. 
 The man to be honored. 
 
 ie nie gu t>ergeffenben Xaten. 
 The deeds never to be forgotten. 
 
 203. The past participle has the prefix ge. Exceptions : insepa- 
 rable verbs, verbs in teren and eien, and the strong participle of 
 the modal auxiliaries (248, 275). 
 
 serftefyen, t)erftanb, t>erftanben, to understand 
 roiberftefyen, tmberftanb, twberftanben, to withstand, resist 
 regteren (12, 3)", regterte, regiert, to rule 
 burfen, burfte, geburft or burfen, to be allowed 
 
 204. The first and third persons plural, present indicative and sub- 
 junctive, are always like the present infinitive. Exceptions : \ ein (221) 
 and tun, which has tuen in the subjunctive. 
 
 205. The stem vowel of the present subjunctive in all German 
 verbs is always like that of the present infinitive. 
 
 206. The use of (jadcu as an auxiliary. All transitive verbs and 
 most intransitive verbs are conjugated with fyaben. 
 
 207. Verbs conjugated with Ija&etU 
 
 1. All transitive verbs. 
 
 2. All reflexive verbs. 
 
 3. The modal auxiliaries. 
 
 4. Most impersonal verbs. 
 
 5. Durative intransitive verbs. 
 
 NOTE. Durative intransitive verbs express duration without calling atten- 
 tion to the beginning or the end of an act. They refer to the whole dura- 
 tion of an action even though it take but a second. 
 
58 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 er Setter fyat ben driller gelobt, the teacher praised the pupil. 
 
 Set Secret fyat fid) gelobt, the teacher praised himself. 
 
 2Ber fyat bag 33ud^ getoollt ? Who wanted the book ? 
 
 @3 fyat geregnet, it rained. 
 
 3$ fyabe gut gefdjlafen, I slept well. 
 
 Sinb fyat geweint, the child has been crying. 
 
 33lume fyat gebliifyt, the flower has bloomed. 
 fyat ben gangen Xag gerttten, he rode the whole day. 
 
 $tnb ^at gefd^rten, the child screamed. 
 ie 2olomotit)e ^at gepftffen, the engine whistled. 
 
 208. The use of fettt as an auxiliary. Only intransitive verbs are 
 conjugated with fein. If, however, they call attention to the duration 
 of an act, they are conjugated with fyaben (207, note). 
 
 209. Verbs conjugated with fetru 
 
 1. Verbs which express a change of condition. 
 
 2. Verbs which denote motion to or from a place. 
 
 3. Verbs which denote motion pure and simple without calling 
 attention to duration. 
 
 4. Verbs which call attention to the beginning, the end, or the 
 result of an action. 
 
 5. The following impersonal verbs: gefdfjefyen, gelingen, gliidten, 
 geraten, mifjltngen, mi^gludten, mtftraten, 
 
 6. (5ein, roerben, bleiben. 
 
 3)er -JRann tft geftorben, the man died. 
 
 tft in bag 2)o,rf geritten, Carl rode into the village. 
 
 $tnb tft gef alien, the child fell. 
 ift etngefdfjlafen, he went to sleep. 
 ift aufgeroadjt, he has waked up. 
 ie Slume tft erbliiljt, the flower has blossomed out. 
 
 @d)iff ift gefunfen, the ship has sunk. 
 ift gefc^eljen, it has happened. 
 ift tnir gelungen, I succeeded. 
 
 bin ba geblieben, I stayed there. 
 
VERBS 59 
 
 210. Classification of tenses. The tenses may be classified as 
 follows : 
 
 1 . Simple : present and imperfect. 
 
 2. Compound : perfect, pluperfect, future, future perfect, present 
 conditional, and perfect conditional. 
 
 NOTE. Compound tenses take an auxiliary, simple tenses do not, as id) 
 fyabe gelobt, id) roerbe loben; but id) lobe, id) lobte. 
 
 211. Formation of tenses. The perfect indicative is formed by 
 adding the past participle to the present indicative of either jew or 
 fyaben. 
 
 212. The perfect subjunctive is formed by adding the past par- 
 ticiple to the present subjunctive of either fein or fyaben. 
 
 J 213. The pluperfect indicative is formed by adding the past par- 
 ticiple to the imperfect indicative of either fein or fyaben. 
 
 214. The pluperfect subjunctive is formed by adding the past 
 participle to the imperfect subjunctive of either fein or fyaben. 
 
 215. The future indicative is formed by adding the present in- 
 finitive to the present indicative of roerben. 
 
 216. The future subjunctive is formed by adding the present 
 infinitive to the present subjunctive of roerben. 
 
 217. The future perfect indicative is formed by adding the per- 
 fect infinitive (199) to the present indicative of roerben. 
 
 218. The future perfect subjunctive is formed by adding the 
 perfect infinitive to the present subjunctive of roerben. 
 
 219. The present conditional is formed by adding the present 
 infinitive to the imperfect subjunctive of roerben. 
 
 220. The perfect conditional is formed by adding the perfect 
 infinitive to the imperfect subjunctive of roerben.- 
 
 NOTE. Apply the above remarks to the conjugations which follow. 
 
 (Spricfjroorter. Ubung macfyt ben ^OZetfter. 
 
 28a3 an3d)en nid^t lernt, lernt an3 nimmermefyr. 
 
6o 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 221. Conjugation of feitt, to be. 
 
 fetn roar 
 
 feienb (201) 
 
 fet feib 
 
 geroefen (197) 
 geroefen fetn (199) 
 feien 6ie (240) 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 Present 
 
 id) bin 
 bu btft 
 erift 
 roir finb 
 ifyr feib 
 fie finb 
 
 fet 
 
 feieft 
 
 fet 
 
 feien 
 
 feiet 
 
 feien 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 id) roar 
 bu roarft 
 er roar 
 rotr roaren 
 il)r roart ' 
 fie roaren 
 
 rodre 
 
 rodreft 
 
 ware 
 
 n>dren 
 
 nwret 
 
 roaren 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 icfy roerbe fein 
 bu toirft fetn 
 er n)irb fein 
 Ttnr roerben fein 
 il)r roerbet fein 
 fie toerben fein 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id) bin geraefen 
 bu btft geroefen 
 er ift geroefen 
 twr finb geraefen 
 i^r feib geraefen 
 fie finb geroefen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 idj roar geroefen 
 bu roarft geroefen 
 er roar geroefen 
 roir roaren geroefen 
 t^r roart geroefen- 
 fie roaren geroefen 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 fet geroefen 
 feieft geroefen 
 fei geroefen 
 feien geroefen 
 fetet geroefen 
 feien geroefen 
 
 rodre geroefen 
 rodreft geroefen 
 rodre geroefen 
 roaren geroefen 
 rodret geroefen 
 roaren geroefen 
 
 Future 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 id) roerbe geroefen fein 
 bu roirft geroefen fein 
 er roirb geroefen fein 
 rotr roerben geroefen fein 
 ifyr roerbet geroefen fetn 
 fie roerben geroefen fein 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 roerbe fein 
 roerbeft fein 
 roerbe fetn 
 roerben fein 
 roerbet fein 
 roerben fein 
 
 roerbe geroefen fein 
 roerbeft geroefen fein 
 roerbe geroefen fein 
 roerben geroefen fetn 
 roerbet geroefen fein 
 roerben geroefen fetn 
 
VERBS 
 
 61 
 
 Present 
 
 id) rxwrbe fein 
 bu nwrbeft fein 
 er tmirbe fein 
 twr nwrben fein 
 ifyr ttwrbet fein 
 fie roiirben fein 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 
 Perfect 
 
 roiirbe geroefen fein 
 ttmrbeft geroefen fein 
 ttwrbe geroefen fein 
 nwrben geroefen fein 
 nnirbet geroefen fein 
 nwrben geroefen fein 
 
 222. Conjugation of (jabcn, to have. 
 
 ^aben 
 ^abenb (201) 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present 
 
 id) fyabe 
 bu |aft 
 
 er fyat 
 
 tyr Ijabt 
 fie fyaben 
 
 fyabe 
 
 Ijabeft 
 
 ^abe 
 
 Ijaben 
 
 l)abet 
 
 fyaben 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 id^ ^citte 
 
 l)dtte 
 
 bu fjatteft 
 
 fytitteft 
 
 er ^atte 
 
 ^dtte 
 
 rt)ir fatten 
 
 fatten 
 
 ifyr ^attet 
 
 ^dttet 
 
 fie fatten 
 
 fatten 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 id) roerbe i)aben 
 bu twrft ^aben 
 er rairb l)aben 
 nnr raerben ^aben 
 i^r raerbet fyaben 
 fie raerben {)aben 
 
 geljabt (197) 
 gefyabt ^aben (199) 
 ^aben @ic (240) 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id) ^abe gefyabt 
 bu ^aft ge^abt 
 er fyat geEjabt 
 n)ir ^aben ge^abt 
 ifyr J)abt ge^abt 
 fie ^aben gefyabt 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 id) ^atte ge^abt 
 bu fyatteft ge^abt 
 er ^aite gefyabt 
 roir fatten geljabt 
 i^r fyattet ge^abt 
 fie fatten getjabt 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 fyabe ge^abi 
 ^abefi ge^abt 
 fyabe ge^abt 
 ^aben ge^abt 
 ^abet gefyabt 
 tjaben ge^abt 
 
 f)dtte ge^abt 
 fyatteft ge^abt 
 ^dtte ge^abt 
 fatten gefyabt 
 ^cittet geljabt 
 fatten ge^abt 
 
 Future 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 roerbe ^aben 
 raerbeft l)aben 
 roerbe ^aben 
 raerben Ejaben 
 raerbet fyaben 
 raerben E)aben 
 
62 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 id) roerbe gefyabt fyaben rnerbe gefyabt fyaben 
 
 bu nrirft gefyabt fyaben roerbeft gefyabt fyaben 
 
 er n)irb gefyabt fyaben roerbe gefyabt fyaben 
 
 ttrir roerben gefyabt fyaben roerben gefyabt ^aben 
 
 t^r roerbet ge^abt fyaben raerbet geE)abt l)aben 
 
 fie roerben ge^abt ^aben roerben getjabt fyaben 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 \ tDurbe ^aben raiirbe gel)abt ^aben 
 
 bu nwrbeft ^aben rourbeft ge^abt fyaben 
 
 er Toiitbe ^aben roiirbe gefyabt ^aben 
 
 rait raiirben ^aben ^ wiitben geljabt ^aben 
 
 iE)t nwrbet ^aben njurbet geE)abt l)aben 
 
 fie roiirben E)aben n>urben ge^abt fyaben 
 
 NOTE. The conditionals are periphrastic forms of the subjunctive, and 
 
 may be used instead of the subjunctive in conditional clauses. 
 
 223. Conjugation of toerben, to become, grow. 
 
 roerben nwrbe (rtwrb) geroorben (197) 
 
 rt)erbenb (201) geroorben fein (199) 
 
 n>erbet roerben @ie (240) 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 Present Perfect 
 
 id) roerbe rcerbe id) bin geraorben fei geraorben 
 
 bu rairft raerbeft bu bifi geroorben feiefi gen)orben 
 
 er roirb raerbe er ift geroorben fei geraorben 
 
 wir rt)erben roerben n)ir finb geraorben feten geroorben 
 
 iFjr rcerbet noerbet iljr feib geroorben feiet geraorben 
 
 fie roerben werben fie finb geworben feien geraorben 
 
VERBS 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 id) raurbe (raarb) raiirbe 
 bu raurbeft(raarbft) raiirbeft 
 er raurbe (raarb) raurbe 
 rair raurben raiirben 
 
 ifyr raurbet raiirbet 
 
 fie raurben raurben 
 
 63 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 Pluperfect 
 
 idj raar geraorben ware geraorben 
 bu raarft geraorben raareft geraorben 
 er raar geraorben raare geraorben 
 rair raaren geraorben raaren geraorben 
 ifyr raart geraorben raaret geraorben 
 fie rcaren geroorben tt)dren geraorben 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 id^ roerbe rt)erben 
 bu rairft raerben 
 cr ttnrb raerben 
 tuir raerben roerben 
 i^r tt)erbet roerben 
 fie roerben raerben 
 
 Future 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 tuerbe roerben 
 werbeft roerben 
 njerbe raerben 
 roerben roerben 
 raerbet tDerben 
 toerben roerben 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 id^ roerbe geroorben fein 
 bu roirft geroorben fein 
 er nrirb geraorben fein 
 roir raerben geraorben fein 
 i^r roerbet geraorben fein 
 fie roerben geroorben fein 
 
 roerbe geraorben fein 
 raerbeft geraorben fein 
 raerbe geraorben fein 
 raerben geraorben fein 
 raerbet geraorben fein 
 raerben geraorben fein 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 
 Present 
 
 id) raiirbe raerben 
 bu raiirbeft raerben 
 er raiirbe raerben 
 rair raiirben raerben 
 i^r raiirbet raerben 
 fie raiirben raerben 
 
 Perfect 
 
 raiirbe geraorben fein 
 raiirbeft geraorben fein 
 raiirbe geraorben fein 
 raiirben geraorben fein 
 raiirbet geraorben fein 
 raiirben geraorben fein 
 
6 4 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 224. Weak verbs. Conjugation of lobcn, to praise. 
 loben lobte gelobt (197) 
 
 lobenb (201) 
 lobe 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 Present 
 
 lobt 
 
 gelobt fyaben (199) 
 loben @ie (240) 
 
 id) lobe 
 bu lobft 
 er lobt 
 
 lobe 
 lobeft 
 lobe 
 
 tt)ir loben 
 
 loben 
 
 tyr lobt 
 fie loben 
 
 lobet 
 loben 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 id) lobte 
 bu lobteft 
 er lobte 
 
 lobte 
 lobteft 
 lobte 
 
 tmr lobten 
 
 lobten 
 
 tyr lobtet 
 fie lobten 
 
 lobtet 
 lobten 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 id) roerbe loben 
 bu tmrft loben 
 er txnrb loben 
 n>ir werben loben 
 ifyr roerbet loben . 
 fie roerben loben 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id) fyabe gelobt 
 bu fyaft gelobt 
 er fyat gelobt 
 n)ir l)aben gelobt 
 ifyr ^abt gelobt 
 fie fyaben gelobt 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 id) l)atte gelobt 
 bu fyatteft gelobt 
 er fyatte gelobt 
 n)ir fatten gelobt 
 iljr Ijattet gelobt 
 fie fatten gelobt 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 fyabe gelobt 
 ^abeft gelobt 
 fyabe gelobt 
 Ijaben gelobt 
 l)abet gelobt 
 ^aben gelobt 
 t 
 
 fyatte gelobt 
 Ijdtteft gelobt 
 l)dtte gelobt 
 fatten gelobt 
 pttet gelobt 
 fatten gelobt 
 
 Future 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 id) n>erbe gelobt ^aben 
 bu roirft gelobt ^aben 
 er wirb gelobt fyaben 
 roir raetben gelobt fyaben 
 il)r n>erbet gelobt ^aben 
 fie roerben gelobt l)aben 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 roerbe loben 
 roerbeft loben 
 werbe loben 
 roerben loben 
 roerbet loben 
 roerben loben 
 
 rx)erbe gelobt Ijaben 
 roerbeft gelobt ^aben 
 n)erbe gelobt Ijaben 
 werben gelobt ^aben 
 raerbet gelobt l)aben 
 n>erben gelobt l)aben 
 
VERBS 65 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 idj ttwrbe loben nwrbe gelobt fyaben 
 
 bu nwrbeft loben ttmrbeft gelobt fyaben 
 
 er nwrbe loben ttwrbe gelobt fyaben 
 
 tt)ir roiirben loben nwrben gelobt fyaben 
 
 ifyr nwrbet loben nwrbet gelobt fyaben 
 
 fie nwrben loben roiirben gelobt fyaben 
 
 225. Table of endings for both weak and strong verbs. 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 1. I. 
 
 2. ft 2. ft 
 
 3- 3- 
 
 1. tt i. it 
 
 2. i 2. t 
 
 3- H 3- tt 
 
 226. Weak verbs in eltt or em drop e before I and r when an 
 ending is added which begins with e. Notice the following forms 
 of fycmbeln, to act, and rubern, to row : 
 
 fycmbeln ^anbelte gefyanbelt rubern ruberte gerubert 
 
 fyanbelnb gefyanbelt fyaben rubernb gerubert Ijaben 
 
 fyanble Ejanbelt ^anbeln @ie rubre rubert rubern <Sie 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present Present 
 
 id) fyanble Ejanble id^ rubre rubre 
 
 bu fyanbelft ^anbleft bu ruberft rubreft 
 
 er Ejanbelt ^anble er rubert rubre 
 
 tmr l)anbeln ^anblen nrir rubern rubren 
 
 il)r ^anbelt fyanblet il)r rubert rubret 
 
 fie fyanbeln l)anblen fie rubern rubren 
 
 I. 
 
 e 
 
 i. 
 
 e 
 
 2. 
 
 ft 
 
 2. 
 
 eft 
 
 3- 
 
 t 
 
 3- 
 
 e 
 
 i. 
 
 en 
 
 i. 
 
 en 
 
 2. 
 
 t 
 
 2. 
 
 et 
 
 3- 
 
 en 
 
 3- 
 
 en 
 
66 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 227. Connective C in weak verbs. Weak verbs which have the 
 connecting vowel e before the regular endings ft, t, and te are those 
 whose stem ends : 
 
 1. In a dental b or t, as reben and beten. 
 
 2. In a single m or n (except lernen and roarnen), as atmen and 
 tegnen ; but llemmfl, fount, etc., with double m or n. 
 
 228. Weak verbs with sibilant stems. Weak verbs whose stems 
 end in the sibilants f, fp, fj, f;, fd), , and 3 generally add t instead 
 of eft in the present indicative second singular, and they always 
 omit the connecting vowel before t and te. 
 
 229. Examples of verbs having connective e and of verbs with 
 sibilant stems : reben, to speak ; atmen, to breathe ; rafen, to rave ; 
 griiften, to greet-, ttwnfdfyen, to wish ; reigen, to excite, charm. 
 
 reben rebete gerebet rafen rafte geraft 
 
 atmen atmete geatmet grii^en gruftte gegrufst 
 
 txwnfdfyen nwnfd)te gettmnfd)t 
 
 rei^en reite gereigt 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE 
 
 id) rebe atme rafe grille nwnfcfye rei^e 
 
 bu rebeft atmeft raf(ef)t gtu^(ef)t n)Unfd)(e)ft rcij(cf)t 
 
 er rebet atmet raft grii^t raunjc^t reijt 
 
 n)ir reben atmen rafen grii^en n>unfc^en rei^en 
 
 ifyr rebet atmet raft grii^t roiinfdjt rei^t 
 
 fie reben atmen rafen gruften n)iinfd^en ret^en 
 
 2lKer Slnfang ift fd^roer. 
 
 SBer 21 fagt, muf$ aud^ S3 fagen. 
 
 ^etne 5Kofen ol)ne 2)ornen. 
 
 (Snbe gut, aEe gut. 
 
 9Benn bie 9Jot am gro^ten, ift otte tlfe am nad^ften. 
 
 SRorgenftunbe fyat olb im SKunbe. 
 
 Gin gute eroiflen ift ein fanfte SRufyefifjen. 
 
 SKu^iggang ift aEer Safter 3lnfang. 
 
 2Ber ben pfennig nid^t efyrt, ift be Balers nid^t roert. 
 
VERBS 
 
 6 7 
 
 230. Irregular weak verbs. Irregular weak verbs have in the 
 imperfect stem and the perfect participle the characteristics of both 
 
 strong and weak verbs. They are : 
 
 IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 brennen brannte gebrannt brennte 
 
 brtngen bracfyte gebrad)t bradfjte 
 
 benlen bad)te gebadfyt bad)te 
 
 biinlen beudfjte gebeud)t beucfyte 
 
 lennen lannte gefannt fennte 
 
 nennen nannte genannt nennte 
 
 rennen rannte gerannt rennte 
 
 fenben fanbte gefanbt fenbete 
 
 roenben roanbte geroanbt roenbete 
 
 NOTE. 2)iinfett, fenben, and roenben are often regularly weak* 
 
 231. Strong verbs. Conjugation of fdjlagctt, to strike, hit. 
 
 frf)lagen 
 
 201) 
 
 (197) 
 
 gefcfylagen l)aben (199) 
 fd)Iagen <Ste (240) 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 Present 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Perfect 
 
 i<* 
 
 bu fd)ldgft fdjlageft 
 
 er fd)lagt fdjlage 
 
 nut fcfylagen fd)lagen 
 
 tfyr fdjlagt fdjlaget 
 
 fie fd)lagen fdjlagen 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 td^ l)abe gefd^lagen 
 bu fyaft gefd)lagen 
 er l)at gefcfylagen 
 n>ir l)aben gefd^lagen 
 t^r fyabt gefd^lagen 
 fie l)aben gefd^lagen 
 
 fyabe gefd^lagen 
 ^abeft gefd^lagen 
 l)abe gefdjlagen 
 l)aben gefd^lagen 
 ^abet gefdjlagen 
 l)aben gefdjlagen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 bu fd^lugft fd^liigeft 
 
 er fd)lug fd)liige 
 
 tt)ir fd^lugen fdf)liigen 
 
 tE)t fd^lugt fd^liiget 
 
 fie fd^lugen fd)liigen 
 
 td^ Ijatte gefdjlagen 
 bu l)atteft gefdjlagen 
 er ^atte gefdjlagen 
 nnr fatten gefdjlagen 
 il)t fyattet gefdjlagen . 
 fie fatten gefdjlagen 
 
 ^atte gefdjlagen 
 
 fyatte gef^Iagen 
 fatten gefdjlagen 
 fyattet gefdjlagen 
 fatten gefdjlagen 
 
68 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Future 
 
 idj roerbe fdjlagen n>erbe fdjlagen 
 
 bu roirft fd)lagen roerbeft fd)lagen 
 
 er rwrb fcfylagen roerbe fdjlagen 
 
 twr roerben fdjlagen roerben fdjlagen 
 
 ifyr tuerbet fcfylagen roerbet fdjlagen 
 
 fie roerben jd)lagen raerben fc^lagen 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 id) tDerbe gefd)Iagen ^aben n>erbe gefdfylagen 
 
 bu rairft gefd^lagen fyaben raerbeft gefc^Iagen 
 
 er twrb gefdt)lagen ^aben tuerbe gefd^Iagen fyaben 
 
 tt)ir raerben gefd)Iagen ^aben roerben gefd^lagen ^aben 
 
 t^r raerbet gefcfylagen fjaben n>erbet gef($lagen ^aben 
 
 fie roerben gefd^lagen ^aben raerben gefd)lagen ^aben 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 . idj roiirbe fd^lagen i($ raiirbe gefd^lagen ^aben 
 
 bu iDiirbeft fd)lagen bu wurbeft gefd^Iagen ^abe 
 
 er ttwrbe fd)Iagen er tourbe gefcfylagen ^aben 
 
 tt)ir tDiirben fd)lagen txrir wiirben gefd^lagen 
 
 il)r txwrbet fd^lagen il)r n>urbet gefd^lagen fyaben 
 
 fie raiirben fd^lagen fie ttwrben gefdjlagen l)aben 
 
 232. The present indicative of strong verbs. Examples of the 
 present indicative of strong verbs : fcfylagen, to strike, hit ; fpred)en, 
 to speak ; fefyen, to see ; gefyett, to go. 
 
 id) fdjlage 
 
 id) fpred^e 
 
 i($ fefye 
 
 id^ ge^e 
 
 bu fd)lagft 
 
 bu fpridjft 
 
 bu flc^p 
 
 bu geljft 
 
 er fd)lagt 
 
 er fprid^t 
 
 er fieE)t 
 
 er gefyt 
 
 roir fd^lagen 
 
 wir fpred^en 
 
 rair fe^en 
 
 wir gel)en 
 
 i^r fc^Iagt 
 
 ifyr fpred^t 
 
 i^r fe^t 
 
 fy gefjt 
 
 fie fdjlagen 
 
 fie fpred^en 
 
 fie fefyen 
 
 fie ge^en 
 
VERBS 69 
 
 233. Strong verbs whose stem vowel is a have vowel mutation 
 in the second and third persons singular present indicative. Also 
 Icwfen, faufen, and ftojjen. Exceptions : fd)affen and flatten. 
 
 234. Strong verbs whose stem vowel is short e have short i in 
 the second and third persons singular present indicative and in the 
 bu form of the imperative. Three verbs whose stem vowel is long 
 e also belong to this class. They are : geben, nefymen, and treten. 
 
 NOTE. The stem vowel e of strong verbs is short when it is followed by 
 two consonants, provided the first of the two is not fy; see also 6 and 7, 2. 
 Examples: effen, fyelfen, treffen. 
 
 235. Seven strong verbs whose stem vowel is long e have ie in 
 the second and third persons singular present indicative and in the 
 bu form of the imperative. They are: befefylen, empfefylen, gefcfyefyen, 
 lefen, fcfyeren, fefyen, and ftefylen. 
 
 236. Seven strong verbs whose stem vowel is long e have no 
 vowel change. They are : beroegen, gefjen, genefen, fyeben, pflegen, 
 ftefyen, and roeben. 
 
 237. Strong verbs whose stems end in b or t take the connecting 
 vowel e before the endings ft and t. They are : binben, finben, lei= 
 ben, meiben, frfjeiben, fd^inben, fcfynetben, fcfytDtnben, fteben, ttrinben, 
 biekn, bitten, gleiten, reiten, fcfyreiten, and ftretten. The follo\ving 
 use e before t only in the second plural of the present and imperfect 
 and in the second plural imperative ; they omit it before ft in the 
 present, but may have it in the imperfect : 
 
 1. laben, braten, fyalten, raten. 
 
 2. treten. 
 
 3. berften, fed)ten, fledjten, gelten, fd^elten. 
 
 NOTE. The verbs under 3, and all but laben under i, omit the tense 
 sign t in the third person present indicative, as e3 gilt, er fycilt. 
 
 238. Strong verbs with stems ending in a sibilant, , ff, fj, fdj, , 
 and g, often omit the connecting vowel e, and the endings eft and et 
 then become t. The third singular present indicative never takes 
 the connecting vowel. Notice the following examples : 
 
70 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE 
 
 tdj effe id) fyetfte id) ft^e 
 
 bu ifet (iffcft) bu l)eifct (l)eifjeft) bu fifct (ftfceft) 
 
 er tftt er fyeijst er fi|t 
 
 tt)ir effen nut fyeiften rair fi^en 
 
 iljr efjt (effet) tyr Ijeifct O&etfeet) tyr ftfct (ftfcet) 
 
 fie efjen fie fyeiften fie fi^en 
 
 239. List of strong verbs whose stem ends in a sibilant : 
 
 1. genefen, fiefen, lefen, preifen. 
 
 2. efjen, frefjen, mefjen. 
 
 3. fid) befleif$en, bei^en, flie^en, geniefcen, gie^en, glei^en, ^ei^en, 
 rei^en, fd^ie^en, fd)Iei^en, fdjmei^en, fprie^en, fto^en, Derbrieften. 
 
 4. brefd^en, lreifd)en, lofd^en. 
 
 5. ft^en, fd^melgen. 
 
 240. The imperative of strong verbs. Examples : 
 
 fd)lag(e) fd)lagt fd^Iagen @ie 
 
 fprid) fpred)t fprec^en ie 
 
 Iie left lefen @ie 
 
 gc^(c) ge^t gefjen @ie 
 
 241. The bu form of the imperative of strong verbs often omits 
 the ending e. It is always omitted in those verbs which change e 
 to t or ie, except in fefyen, which has both fiefy and fiefye. 
 
 242. The pronoun @tc, in imperative forms, is always expressed, 
 but bu and tfyr are expressed only in case of emphasis. 
 
 243. The ifyr form is always like the second plural present in- 
 dicative. For the vowel in the bu form see 234-236. 
 
 244. Vowel mutation in the imperative of strong verbs occurs 
 only in those verbs whose stem vowel is mutated in the infinitive. 
 
 245. The imperfect subjunctive of strong verbs is formed on the 
 imperfect stem by mutating the stem vowel (a, o, u) and adding e. 
 
 246. Separable verbs. A separable verb is composed of a verb 
 and a separable prefix. The prefix of a separable verb always bears 
 the accent. For the order see 304. 
 
VERBS 71 
 
 247. Conjugation of nnfftcfjcu, to stand up. 
 
 aufftefyen fianb . . . auf aufgeftanben 
 
 aufftefyenb aufgeftanben fein 
 
 ftefye auf ftefyt auf ftefyen @te auf 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 id) ftefye auf id) ftanb auf 
 
 bu ftefyft auf bu ftanbeft auf 
 
 er ftefyt auf er ftanb auf 
 
 roir ftefjen auf roir fianben auf 
 
 tfyr fte^t auf il)r ftanbet auf 
 
 fie ftefyen auf fie ftanben auf 
 
 Perfect Future 
 
 id^ bin aufgeftanben id^ n>erbe auffte^en 
 
 Pluperfect Future Perfect 
 
 idl) war aufgeftanben i($ raerbe aufgeftanben fein 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 id) raiirbe aufftefyen id^ roiirbe aufgeftanben fein 
 
 248. Inseparable verbs. An inseparable verb is composed of a 
 verb and an inseparable prefix (203, 250). 
 
 249. Conjugation of fcetfteljett, to understand. 
 
 flerftefyen Derfianb t)erftanben 
 
 t)erftefyenb uerftanben !>aben 
 
 en @ic 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 Present Imperfect Perfect 
 
 idf) uerftelje id^ t>erftanb id^ l)abe t)erftanben 
 
 bu t>erftel)ft bu t)erftanbeft Pluperfect 
 
 er t)crfte^t er uerftanb id^ ^atte t)erftanben 
 
 rait Dcrflc^en rair t)erftanben Future 
 
 ifyr t)erfie^t i^r werftanbet id) raerbe 
 
 fie t)erftel)en fie t)erftanben etc. 
 
72 HANDBOOK OF ^GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 250. Prefixes. The inseparable prefixes are be, ge, ent (etnp be- 
 fore f), er, t)er, ger, and nriber. 
 
 251. The separable prefixes are generally prepositions, adverbs, 
 adjectives, or nouns. They usually retain their regular meaning. 
 Examples: aufftefyen, fortgefjen, loglaffen, fyauSfyalten. 
 
 252. The prefixes which may be either separable or inseparable 
 are the prepositions burd), iiber, urn, imter, and the adverb ttneber. 
 When separable the prefix bears the accent, when it is inseparable 
 the verb is accented. 
 
 253. Reflexive verbs. A reflexive verb is one whose subject is 
 both the doer and the recipient of an action. 
 
 254. The reflexive pronoun is the accusative of the correspond- 
 ing subject form, except in the third person, where it is [id). A few 
 reflexive verbs govern the dative and a still smaller number the 
 genitive, as : id) fd)metd)le mir, bu fd)meid)elft bit, er fdf)meid)elt fid), 
 and idj fpotte meiner, bu fpotteft beiner, er fpottet feiner. 
 
 255. In the simple tenses the reflexive pronoun follows the verb, 
 in the compound tenses it follows the auxiliary. 
 
 256. Any German verb may.be reflexive if the sense permits. 
 
 257. Reflexive verbs do not have a passive voice. 
 
 258. Conjugation of fid) fdjlngen, to strike one's self. 
 
 fid) fd)lagen fd)lug fid) (fid)) gejd)lagen 
 
 fidj fd)lagenb fidj gefd)lagen fyaben 
 
 fdjlage bid) f#)tagt eud) fd)lagen ie fid) 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present 
 
 id) fd)lage mid) id) fdjlage midj 
 
 bu fdjltigft bid) bu fd)lageft bid) 
 
 er fd)ldgi fid) er fd)lage fid) 
 
 nrir fd^Iagen un tt)ir f($Iagen unS 
 
 i^r fdjlagt eud^ i^r fdjlaget eud^ 
 
 fie fcfylagen fid^ fie fdjlagen fid() 
 
VERBS 73 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 id() fcfylug mid) . id) fd)luge mid(j 
 bu fd)lugft bidl) bu fdljlugeft bid) 
 
 er fdjjlug fief) er fdjliige fidf) 
 
 tDtr fcfylugen un3 nrir fd)liigen un3 
 
 ifyr fdjlugt eudfj tf)t fd^Iiiget eudfj 
 
 fie fd^Iugen ftd^ fie fcfyliigen fic^ 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id^ ^abe midf) gefd^lagen id^ Ijabe mid^ gefdfjlagen 
 
 bu l)aft bid^ gefcf)lagen bu fyabeft bid^) gefd^lagen 
 
 er fyat fid^ gefd^Iagen er l)abe fidf) gefd^Iagen 
 
 tt)ir ^aben un gefdfylagen roir ^aben ung gefd)Iagen 
 
 ifjr Ijabt eud^ gefdjlagen t^r fyabet eud^ gefd^Iagen 
 
 fie l)aben fidf) gefc^lagen fie E)aben fid^ gefcfylagen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 id^ l)atte mid^ gefcfylagen id^ ^dtte mid^ gefc^Iagen 
 
 Future 
 
 id) raerbe mid^ fd^Iagen id) raerbe mi($ fd)Iagen 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 itf) roerbe mid^ gefd)Iagen fyaben id^ raerbe mid^ gefd^lagen fyaben 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 id^ nwrbe mid^ fd)Iagen id^ tt)Urbe mid) gefd^Iagen ^aben 
 
 259. Separable reflexive verbs. Reflexive verbs may take a sep- 
 arable or an inseparable prefix (250, 251). The conjugation of fidf) 
 umfefyen, to look around, is as follows: 
 
 fid) umfefyen fafy fid) um (fid)) umgefefyen 
 
 fid) umfefyenb fid) umgefefjen fyaben 
 
 fiel) bid um fefyt eud^ um fe{)en 6ie fid^ um 
 
74 ' HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present 
 
 itf) fefye mid) urn id) fefye mid) um 
 
 bu fiefyft bid() um bu fefyeft bid() um 
 
 er fiefyt fid) um er fefye fid) um 
 
 nrir. fefyen un3 um tt)ir fefyen un3 um 
 
 ifyr fefyt eudjj um tfyr fefyet eudfj um 
 
 fie fefyen fid^ um fie feEjen fid) um 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 idj fal) mid) um id) fd^e mid^ um 
 
 Perfect 
 
 idl) ^abe midf) umgefefyen id^ ^abe mid) umgefe^en 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 id() E)atte mi($ umgefe^en id(j E)dtte midf) umgefe^en 
 
 Future 
 
 id() werbe mid^ umfeE)en i($ roerbe mid^ umfe^en 
 
 Futtire Perfect 
 
 id(j roerbe mid^ umgeje^en ^aben idjj roerbe mid^ umgefe^en E)aben 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 idi) roiirbe mid) umfefyen idf)rDurbemid^umgefe^en^aben 
 
 260. The passive voice. The German verb forms its passive 
 voice either with fein or with roerben (196). The passive with roerbett 
 may be called the actional passive, and the passive with fein the 
 perfective passive. 
 
 261. The actional passive denotes action in progress. It is 
 formed by combining the past participle of a transitive verb with 
 the conjugation of the auxiliary verb roerben. Notice the position 
 of this participle in the conjugation (264). 
 
 262. The past participle geroorben drops the prefix ge when pre- 
 ceded by a past participle. Notice the compound tenses in the 
 conjugation (264). 
 
VERBS 75 
 
 263. The perfective passive denotes completed action. It is 
 formed by combining the past participle of a transitive verb with 
 the conjugation of the auxiliary verb fein. Observe carefully the 
 following illustrative sentences showing the difference between the 
 actional and the perfective passive : 
 
 au3 rotrb gebaut, the house is being built. 
 au3 ift gebaut, the house is built. 
 SDte ur rotrb gefcfyloffen, the door is being dosed. 
 2)te iir ift gefdfjloffen, the door is dosed. 
 
 264. Conjugation of the actional passive. Example: lobw, to praise. 
 
 gelobt roerben ttwrbe gelobt gelobt roorben 
 
 gelobt roerbenb gelobt tuorben fein 
 
 fei gelobt feib gelobt feien ie gelobt 
 
 NOTE. The passive imperative is formed with jein instead of roerbett. 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present 
 
 id) roerbe gelobt idj roerbe gelobt 
 
 bu n)it[t gelobt bu roerbeft gelobt 
 
 er tDtrb gelobt er roerbe gelobt 
 
 tt)ir roerben gelobt tt)ir roerben gelobt 
 
 ifyr roerbet gelobt t^r raerbet gelobt 
 
 fie roerben gelobt fie roerben gelobt 
 
 NOTE. 3^ tt)erbe gelobt means I am being praised (263, sentences). 
 Imperfect 
 
 idj ttwrbe gelobt idj raiirbe gelobt 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id^ bin gelobt roorben id^ jet gelobt roorben 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 i<^ roar gelobt raorben id^ radre gelobt roorben 
 
 Future 
 
 id^ tt)erbe gelobt trjerben id^ rcerbe gelobt roerben 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 tdfj roerbe gelobt roorben jein td^ roerbe gelobt roorben fein 
 
76 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 Present Perfect 
 
 id) roiirbe gelobt roerben id) roiirbe gelobt roorben fein 
 
 265. Conjugation of the perfective passive. Example: tetten, 
 to save. 
 
 gerettet fein roar gerettet gerettet geroefen 
 
 gerettet feienb gerettet geroefen fein 
 
 fei gerettet feib gerettet feten @ie gerettet 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 Present 
 
 id) bin gerettet id) fei gerettet 
 
 bu bift gerettet bu feieft gerettet 
 
 er ift gerettet er fei gerettet 
 
 roir finb gerettet roir feten gerettet 
 
 ifyr feib gerettet ifyr feiet gerettet 
 
 fie finb gerettet fie feien gerettet 
 
 NOTE. 3d) bin gerettet means I am saved (263, sentences). 
 Imperfect 
 
 id) roar gerettet id) roare gerettet 
 
 Perfect 
 
 id? bin gerettet geroefen id) fei gerettet geroefen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 id) roar gerettet geroefen id^ roare gerettet geroefen 
 
 Future 
 
 id^ roerbe gerettet fein id^ roerbe gerettet fein 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 i$ roerbe gerettet geroefen fein id) roerbe gerettet geroefen fein 
 
 CONDITIONALS 
 
 Present Perfect 
 
 id) roiirbe gerettet fein id) roiirbe gerettet geroefen fein 
 
VERBS 77 
 
 266. Substitutes for the passive. The passive voice occurs less 
 frequently in German than in English. Some of the most common 
 substitutes are : 
 
 1. 9Kan, as subject of an active verb. 
 
 9Kcm fagt, ba er lugt. 
 It is said that he lies. 
 
 3Jtan baut aufer au3 ol unb (Stein. 
 People build houses of wood and stone, or 
 Houses are built of wood and stone. 
 
 2. A reflexive verb (especially when the agent is not important), 
 whose subject may be the agent of the action or the agent may be 
 implied in the whole sentence. 
 
 3)er <5d)liiffel txnrb fid) finben. 
 The key will be found. 
 
 5Da 3j)t bffnete fid) bent Sieger. 
 The gate was opened to the victor. 
 
 3. Saffen with a reflexive verb. 
 
 )a3 iaf$t fid) Ieid)t fagen. 
 That is easily said. 
 
 @r f)at fid) nidjt iiberreben laffen. 
 
 He did not allow himself to be persuaded. 
 
 267. The modal auxiliaries. The modal auxiliaries are : 
 
 IMPERFECT SUBJ. 
 
 biirfen burfte geburft to be permitted biirfte 
 
 Ibnnen lonnte gelonnt to be able (can) lonnte 
 
 ntogen ntod^te gemoc^t to like (may) mbdjte 
 
 muffen ntu^te gentu^t to be compelled (must} mii^te 
 
 foEen foHte gefoHt to be obliged (shall) f cute 
 
 rooEen raollte geraoEt to be willing (will) rooftte 
 
 NOTE. These six verbs and the verb ttriffen are often called preterit- 
 present verbs, since their present tense has the form of the imperfect of 
 strong verbs (273). 
 
78 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 268. 280 Hen is the only modal auxiliary which has imperative 
 forms : rooUe, roodt, rrjoHen 6te. 
 
 269. Sonnen sometimes means to know. $onnen @ie 2)eutfcf)? 
 Do you know German ? 
 
 270. often sometimes means to be said: @r foft reidj fein, he is 
 said to be rich. 
 
 271. The present indicative of the modal auxiliaries and roiffen. 
 
 id) barf farm mag mu foil roift trjeif; 
 
 bit barffi fannft magft muftf foftft rrjiftft roeifct 
 
 er barf farm mag muj$ foft roill roeift 
 
 rmr burfen fonnen mogen miiffen foHen rrjoHen rrjiffen 
 
 i^r biirft fonnt mogt miifet foflt rooUt roiffet (rrji^t) 
 
 fie biirfen fonnen mogen miiffen foHen rooCien nriffen 
 
 NOTE. The principal parts of rotflen are rotffen, WU^te, geroufjt, and the 
 imperfect subjunctive is roiijjte. 
 
 272. The vowel in the singular of the present indicative, except 
 in foUen, is different from that of the plural, and the tense sign 1 
 is omitted in the third person singular (267, note). The remaining 
 tenses are formed regularly. 
 
 273. The modal auxiliaries were originally strong verbs, whose 
 imperfect assumed a present meaning, and in its place a new weak 
 imperfect was formed. 
 
 274. Infinitives depending on the modal auxiliaries omit the 
 preposition u. Infinitives depending on fufylen, fybren, lafjen, and 
 fefyen always, and on bleiben, fyet^en, fyelfen, lefyren, and lernen often 
 take the same construction. The verb fpagieren also omits gu when 
 it depends on gefyen, fasten, and tetten. 
 
 @r ttritt fommen, he wants to come. 
 28ir fonnen Sfynen fyelfen, we can help you. 
 $d) fybre jemanb tufen, I hear some one calling. 
 $cf) gefje fpagieren, I am taking a walk. 
 
VERBS 79 
 
 275. The past participle of the modal auxiliaries occurs in its 
 old form, that is, without the prefix ge and with the ending en, if it 
 is preceded by an infinitive (203). eif$en, fyelfen, laffen, fefyen, and 
 sometimes fyoren, lefyren and lernen, take the same form of participle 
 when an infinitive precedes. 
 
 (Sr fyatte bag 33udj gerooflt, he had wanted the book. 
 
 Gr fyatte bag 33ud) fefyen rooKen, he had wanted to see the book. 
 
 3$ roerbe eg gerooEt fyaben, I shall have wanted to do it. 
 
 $dj roerbe eg fyaben tun rooHen (277), I shall have wanted to do it. 
 
 Qdj fyabe i^n tufen fyoren, I heard him calling. 
 
 $<$) ^abe fie tangen fel)en, I saw her dance. 
 
 u ^atteft ba bleiben follen, you should have remained there. 
 
 276. Saffen and fetn, and sometimes bleiben, fyeifcett, ^oren, fe^en, 
 and fiefjen, are followed by an active infinitive with passive meaning. 
 
 @r Itifct ein aug bauen: 
 He is having a house built. 
 
 @3 ift nid)tg gu fefyen. 
 There is nothing to be seen. 
 
 2Ba ift gu tun ? 
 What is to be done ? 
 
 277. A modal auxiliary may take an infinitive as complement. 
 Such an infinitive immediately precedes the modal auxiliary in the 
 compound tenses. In the future perfect fyaben is removed from its 
 position at the end and is placed before the complementary infini- 
 tive : id) roerbe gefonnt fjctben. but id) roerbe fyaben fdjlagen fonnen. 
 Notice the following synopsis in the indicative : 
 
 id) lann fdjlagen 
 
 id) lonnte fdjlagen 
 
 id^ E)abe fd)lagen fonnen 
 
 id) Ejatte fd^lagen fbnnen 
 
 id^ roerbe fd^Iagen lonnen 
 
 id^ raerbe fyaben fd)(agen lonnen 
 
80 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 278. The forms id) farm gefdjlagen fyaben (/ may have struck) 
 and id) lonnte gefdjlagen fyaben (I might have struck) date from an 
 earlier period of the language, when the modal auxiliaries did not 
 yet have a past participle, and, instead of using the perfect and 
 pluperfect tenses of the modal auxiliary with a dependent present 
 infinitive (277), it was necessary to add a perfect infinitive to the 
 present and imperfect of the modal auxiliary. Compare the Eng- 
 lish translation of these expressions. 
 
 279. Impersonal verbs. The impersonal form of verbs occurs : 
 
 1 . In expressions denoting the phenomena of nature. 
 
 @ fd&neit. @3 blifct. @3 ift warm. 
 
 @ regnet. @3 fyagelt. @3 ift fdjnwl. 
 
 @S borinert. @3 friert. @3 ift fityl. 
 
 2. In expressions denoting states of body or of mind. 
 
 @3 friert mid). 
 @3 fdjnrinbelt mir. 
 
 3. In expressions of time. 
 
 @ ift jroolf U^r. 
 
 4. In certain idioms. 
 
 @3 tut mir leib. 
 @3 gel)t mir gut. 
 @3 fe^lt mir etnwS. 
 
 5. In phrases with geben and fetn, as e gibt, e ift. 
 
 6^ gibt bie3 3 a ^ l Dbft, there is much fruit this year. 
 
 @3 ift Dbft in bem Sorbe, there is fruit in the basket. 
 
 @3 gibt aHerlei Seute in ber 2BeIt, there are all kinds of people in the 
 
 world. 
 63 finb gnwngig <5tubenten in biefem 3t8*ttt$*/ there are twenty 
 
 students in this room. 
 
 NOTE. The impersonal form of geben is used in broad general state- 
 ments, while that of'fein is used in speaking of specific persons and things. 
 
VERBS 8 I 
 
 280. The subjunctive. The indicative in general may be regarded 
 as the mood of the actual, the subjunctive as the mood of the ideal 
 and unreal. The indicative deals with facts, .the subjunctive with 
 what is desirable, possible, probable, or represented as a matter of 
 hearsay. The use of the subjunctive, therefore, depends upon the 
 question of reality or unreality. It occurs in direct and indirect 
 discourse, and in both principal and dependent clauses, but its use 
 in dependent clauses is rare except in indirect discourse. 
 
 NOTE. The subjunctive may occur in noun, adjective, and adverbial 
 clauses. 
 
 281. The present and imperfect subjunctive are alike in tem- 
 poral meaning, both denoting present or future time, except in 
 indirect discourse, where they are used in place of the present only 
 (never the future) of direct discourse (288). A statement in the 
 present subjunctive, however, is felt as more probable than one in 
 the imperfect. The pluperfect always denotes past time. 
 
 The rule, therefore, for tense in the subjunctive, except in in- 
 direct discourse, is : 
 
 1 . Present or future time is expressed by either the present or 
 the imperfect. 
 
 2. Past time by the pluperfect. 
 
 282. The hortatory subjunctive supplies missing imperative 
 forms. 
 
 efye er nad) aufe. 
 Let him go home. 
 
 ingen tmr ein Sieb. 
 Let us sing a song. 
 
 @bel fei bet 9ftenfrf). 
 Let man be noble. 
 
 283. The optative subjunctive is used in wishes. The words 
 bod) and nut are frequently used with the verb. Periphrastic forms 
 with mogen, lonnen, and rootten are usually possible. Notice the 
 following subdivisions : 
 
82 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 1. The more probable optative (present). 
 
 ein 3Retrf) lomme ! 
 May thy kingdom come ! 
 
 Sang lebe bet $onig ! 
 Long live the king ! 
 
 SKoge er balb lomtnen ! 
 May he soon come ! 
 
 2. The less probable optative (imperfect). 
 
 Same er bod) fyeute, morgen, narfjfte 2Bod(je, etc.! 
 
 Would that he would come to-day, to-morrow, next week, etc. ! 
 
 turbe er borf) ! 
 
 O that he would die ! 
 
 A wish may be impossible of realization. 
 
 Sebte er borf) norf) ! 
 
 Would that he were still alive ! 
 
 3. The optative subjunctive in past time (pluperfect). 
 
 ZBtire er nur geftern gefommen ! 
 O that he had come yesterday ! 
 
 284. The concessive subjunctive occurs in principal and depend- 
 ent clauses. The concession made in the dependent clause in no 
 way affects the assertion of the principal clause. Periphrastic forms 
 with mogen or lonnen are often used. 
 
 i. The more probable concessive subjunctive (present). 
 
 @3 fet fo, rote bu gefagt fyaft. 
 Let it be as you have said. 
 
 ei ber Serg aurf) norf) fo fyorf),, id) befteige tfyn (297). 
 IRbge ber Serg aud^ norf) fo l)od^ fein, td^ befteige ifyn. 
 Let the mountain be ever so high, I shall ascend it. 
 
 NOTE. Even the indicative is possible here : 3ft ber 23erg CMCf) nod) fo 
 tyorf), ic^ befteige i^n, or 3Jtag ber Serj auc^ nodi) fo fjorf) fein, id^ befteige ifjn. 
 
VERBS 83 
 
 2. The less probable concessive subjunctive (imperfect). 
 SBdre ber 33erg and) nod) fo fyod), id) beftetge tfyn. 
 2Jtbd()te ber 33erg audi) nodi) fo fyodf) fetn, id) befteige ifyn. 
 Were the mountain ever so high, I shall ascend it. 
 
 285. The potential subjunctive denotes possibility, and is closely 
 related to the subjunctive of unreality. Periphrastic forms with 
 mbgen, fbnnen, foflen, and bitrfen are often used. 
 
 1 . In doubting inquiries and exclamations. 
 
 2Bare eg n)of)l mbglidf) ? Would it perhaps be possible? 
 $bnnte eg roofyl tnbglid) fetn ? Could it be possible? 
 2Ber txwj$te bag nid)t ! Who wouldn't know that ! 
 
 2. In modest assertions. 
 
 rotire raohl moqlidb,^ J 
 
 . .. c r , P . } ^^ miM/ be possible. 
 
 burfte roofyl fetn, J 
 
 te biirften fid) getrrt fyaben, ^ w^y ^^^ tow mistaken. 
 
 @3 Ite^e ftd^ nod^ tneleS bariiber fagen, w^r// w/^/ still be said in 
 
 regard to that. 
 $d) bad)te, bag nwfjte bod^ ein jeber, I should think everybody would 
 
 know that. 
 
 3. In unreal conditions. 
 
 The potential subjunctive in unreal conditions has two tenses 
 the imperfect, which denotes present time, and the pluperfect, 
 which denotes past time. In the principal clause (the conclusion) 
 the present and perfect conditionals may be used instead of the 
 imperfect and pluperfect. This is also possible in the subordinate 
 clause (the condition), but it occurs much less frequently. 
 
 SBenn id) 3ett ptte, fo fdjrtebe td^ ttytn etnen 33rtef, or fo nwrbe tdj 
 
 i^m etnen 93rtef fd^retben, 
 If I had time, I should write him a letter. 
 
 2Benn id& 3tt ge^abt l)dtte, fo ^atte i^ t^m einen Srtef gefc^rteben, 
 
 or fo roiitbe tdfj i{)m etnen 93rtef gefd^rteben fyaben. 
 If I had had time, I should have written him a letter. 
 
84 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 Occasionally the imperfect indicative occurs in either clause of 
 unreal conditions, thus making the statement more real. 
 
 JRit biefem groeiten $feil burd()fd)of$ idj @ud), roenn id) mein liebeg 
 
 $inb getroffen fettle. 
 With this second arrow I should have pierced your body if I had hit 
 
 my child. 
 
 4. In clauses after al3 ob and al3 roenn. If ob or roenn is 
 omitted, the clause has inverted order. 
 
 6r fiefyt au3, al3 ob (al roenn) er Iranf rodre. 
 @r fiefyt au3, al3 nwre er fran!. 
 He looks as if he were sick. 
 
 5. In clauses after a question or a negative. 
 
 The subjunctive is used in a subordinate clause after a question, a 
 comparative, the adverb gu plus an adjective or adverb, a negative, 
 a negative conjunction (bafc nicfyt, ofyne ba, al bajs), or a negative 
 relative (bet ntd^t, roelcfyer ni($t). If, however, the statements are 
 regarded as facts, the indicative must be used. 
 
 (a) More probable (present). 
 
 2B.O tft bet Sefyerjte, bet taud^e in biefe Siefe nieber ? Where is the 
 courageous man who wotild dare to dive down into these depths ? 
 
 9Jid)t3 ift, bag bte eraaltigen l)emme, there is nothing that would 
 deter the mighty. 
 
 $3) nwnfdje mdjt3 33effere3, al ba^ e Q^nen rootyl ge^e, I wish noth- 
 ing better than that you may fare well. 
 
 Reiner ifi, ber no$ aufred^t ftefye, a(g id^ gang aEein, there is no one 
 still standing erect save me alone. 
 
 (fr) Less probable (imperfect and pluperfect). 
 
 2Bo ift ein Serg im gangen Sanb, ben er nicfyt beftiege ? Where is there 
 a mountain in the whole country which he would not ascend ? 
 
 3$re 33erfbf)nung ift u plo^lid^, al^ ba^ fie bauerfyaft fein fonnte, 
 your reconciliation is too sudden to be able to last. 
 
VERBS -85 
 
 2Bo tfi ein 33erg im ganen Sanb, ben er nidjt beftiegen fycitte ? Where 
 is there a mountain in the whole country which he has not climbed? 
 
 3$re SSerfbfynung roar 511 plotjlici), al3 baj$ fie fyatte bauerfyaft fein 
 f i)ttnen (296), your reconciliation was too sudden to be-able to last. 
 
 286. Indirect discourse. In indirect discourse the speaker or 
 writer reproduces in his own words what has previously been said, 
 thought, or felt. If he wishes definitely to represent as uncertain 
 the statements which he is reporting, or if he does not wish to 
 assume any responsibility in regard to them, he always uses the 
 subjunctive. If he positively wishes to indorse what he is report- 
 ing, or to lend greater vividness and directness to it, he uses the in- 
 dicative. Accordingly the question of mood in indirect discourse 
 depends on the speaker's or writer's attitude toward that which he 
 is reporting. 
 
 287. In changing from direct to indirect discourse the -present 
 and future may remain, and the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect 
 are put into the perfect. When the present, the perfect, the future, 
 and the future perfect subjunctive are like the corresponding forms 
 of the indicative the imperfect is substituted for the present, the 
 pluperfect for the perfect, the present conditional for the future, and 
 the perfect conditional for the future perfect. The present with future 
 meaning is generally changed to the future in indirect discourse. 
 
 288. The following table of tenses may serve to illustrate the 
 rules given above (287) : 
 
 DIRECT DISCOURSE INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 Present Present or Imperfect 
 
 Imperfect "1 
 
 , f Perfect or 
 
 Perfect \ 
 
 , I Pluperfect 
 
 Pluperfect J 
 
 f Future or 
 Future \ _ 
 
 I Present Conditional 
 
 f Future Perfect or 
 Future Perfect \ ^ . 
 
 I Perfect Conditional 
 
86 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 289. The more common changes from direct to indirect 
 course may be illustrated by the following sentences : 
 
 DIRECT 
 
 3d) bin Irani. 
 / am sick. 
 
 $d) roar Irani. " 
 
 3>d) bin Irani geroefen. 
 %tf) roar Irani geroefen. 
 / was sick. 
 
 SDer Sefyrer roirb nid)t 
 
 men. 
 The teacher will not come. 
 
 @ie roe^ben lommen. 
 They will come. 
 
 3ft e3 roa^r? 
 Is it true ? 
 
 fyaben @ie getan ? 
 What did you do ? 
 
 6r roar frufyer Sefyrer. 
 
 INDIRECT 
 
 @r fagt (fagte), bafc er Irani feu 
 He says (said) that he is (was) sick. 
 
 Gr fagt (fagte), baf; er Irani geroefen fei. 
 
 He says (said) that he has (had) been sick. 
 
 er filler fjofft (fyoffte), ba ber Sefyrer 
 
 nidjt lommen roerbe. 
 The pupil hopes (hoped] that the teacher 
 
 will (would) not come. 
 
 6r meint (meinte), bafe fie lommen roiir- 
 
 ben (not roerben). 
 He thinks (thought) that they will (would) 
 
 come. 
 
 @r fragt (fragte), ob e3 roa^r fei. 
 
 He asks (asked) whether it is (was) true. 
 
 (Sr fragt (fragte), roa id) getan ^atte. 
 He asks (asked) what I have (had) done. 
 
 9Jf an fagt (fagte), baft erfrii^er2el)rer roar. 
 
 He was formerly a teacher. They say (said) he used to be a teacher. 
 
 2Bir lommen au3 Sfyuringen. @ie fagten, ba^ fie au X^itringen lamen. 
 We come from Thuringia. They said that they came from Thuringia. 
 
 NOTE. Statements .of certainty may be followed by either the subjunc- 
 tive or the indicative. 
 
 r rouf$te, ba id) Irani roar, he knew that I was sick. 
 6r rou^te, baf$ fie nic^t lommen roerbe, he knew that she would not come. 
 $d) roar geroi^, bafs er unrest ^atte, I was certain that he was wrong. 
 Gr beroie3, ba^ er unfd^ulbig fei, he proved that he was innocent. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS 8/ 
 
 ORDER OF WORDS 
 
 290. The position of words in a German sentence is largely 
 determined by emphasis. The most important position is the be- 
 ginning of the sentence, the next important the end, and the least 
 important the middle of the sentence. Euphony and logical im- 
 portance are also taken into consideration. A general impression 
 as to the arrangement of words may be gained from the following 
 scheme : 
 
 1. Subject 7. Predicate adjective or noun 
 
 2. Inflected part of verb 8. Negative 
 
 3. Pronoun object 9. Separable prefix 
 
 4. Adverb of time 10. Past participle 
 
 5. Noun object n. Infinitive 
 
 6. Other adverbs 
 
 291. The position of the inflected part of the verb is not deter- 
 mined by emphasis or logical importance. According as it stands 
 after the subject, before the subject, or at the end of a clause, three 
 fixed types of order the normal, the inverted, and the transposed 
 are distinguished. 
 
 292. The normal order, in which the inflected part of the verb 
 follows the subject, occurs : 
 
 1. In independent declarative clauses, unless some element other 
 than the subject begins the clause. 
 
 2. In independent interrogative sentences whose subject is an 
 interrogative pronoun or a noun modified by an interrogative 
 adjective. 
 
 $inb fyat eine 9tofe, the child has a rose. 
 
 $inb fyat mir jet feine 9Rofe gegeben, the child has now given 
 
 me its rose. 
 
 2Ber fyat bie 3Rofe gdjabt ? Who had the rose ? 
 SBeldjer 3lpfel ift bet grbfcte ? Which apple is the largest! 
 2Btr tDerben ifyn begleiten, we shall accompany him. 
 
88 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 293. The inverted order, in which the inflected part of the verb 
 precedes the subject, occurs: 
 
 1. In independent declarative clauses beginning with some ele- 
 ment other than the subject. 
 
 2. In independent interrogative sentences beginning with some 
 element other than the subject. 
 
 3. In imperative sentences. 
 
 4. In principal clauses, for emphasis, in connection with bod). 
 
 5. In sentences in which a participle or an infinitive is put first 
 for the sake of emphasis. 
 
 eftern lam $ri| u fpat, yesterday Fred was tardy. 
 
 JRorgen roerben roir nadl) aufe gefyen, to-morrow we shall go home. 
 
 2Bem gefyort biefe $eber ? To whom does this pen belong ? 
 
 2Beld)en 2lpfe( rooflen @ie? Which apple do you wish ? 
 
 $m 3 U fwfc bit Xage am langften, in June the days are the longest. 
 
 aben 6ie fid) gefiird)tet? Were you afraid? 
 
 Sen 9ftann fenne id) nidjt, that man I do not know. 
 
 ruir an f am en, roar e3 fdf)on ^ag, when we arrived it was day. 
 3, bente id), ift meine $flidf)t, that, I think, is my duty. 
 ,,golge mir", fagte er, "follow me" said he. 
 3ft bet Snabe fleij$ig ? Is the boy industrious ? 
 eben @ie mir bag S3ud), bitte, give me the book, please. 
 efyen rair nad) aufe, let us go home. 
 ab id) ben SJJarlt unb bie tra^en bod^ nie fo einfam gefefyen ! Why, 
 
 I never saw the market and the streets so deserted ! 
 eflofyen roar allcS, all had fled. 
 
 rmorben lafjen fann er mic^, nid^t rid^ten, he may have me murdered, 
 but he cannot judge me. 
 
 294. In the transposed order the inflected part of the verb stands 
 at the end of the clause. This is also called the dependent order, 
 since it occurs only in dependent clauses : 
 
 ift ber 3Jknn, ber geftern fyier roar, that is the man who was 
 here yesterday. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS 89 
 
 3$ fyabe ba3 $ud(), ba3 idfj Berloren fyatte, I have the book which I 
 
 had lost. 
 
 3>d) roetjs, baf$ er nidf)t lontmen roirb, I know that he will not come. 
 2)er Sebtente fagte, baj$ fein err jet nidf)t gu aufe fei, M<? servant 
 
 said that his master was not at home now. 
 9Zad)bem id) ben Srief gefdfjrieben fyatte, bin idf) fpajteren gegangen, 
 
 after I had written the letter I took a walk. 
 SSer roeifj, nw3 bie 3 u ^ un f^ un ^ bringen rairb ^ Who knows what 
 
 the future has in store for us ? 
 r^tifyle mir, raa gefcfyefyen ift, tell me what has happened. 
 
 295. The conjunctions baj$ and roenn are sometimes omitted. If 
 baj$ is dropped, the order is normal, or, if some word other than 
 the subject introduces the subordinate clause, inverted. If roenn 
 is omitted, the order is inverted. 
 
 $d) tt>eij$, er rturb nirf)t fommen. 
 I know he will not come. 
 
 3)er Sebtente fagte, jet fei fein err nid^t ju aufe. 
 The servant said his master was not at home now. 
 
 2Bdren >ie gefiern gefommen, fo fatten @te un u aufe getroffen. 
 If you had come yesterday, you would have found us at home. 
 
 NOTE. See 294, third and fourth sentences, and 181. 
 
 296. A dependent clause containing an infinitive followed by 
 another infinitive or by the old form of the past participle (275) has 
 the normal order. In the future perfect not only the inflected form 
 of roerben is removed from the end of the clause but also the 
 infinitive fyaben. 
 
 3d) roetft, ba tdf) e3 nid^t roerbe tun lonnen^ 
 I know that I shall not be able to do it. 
 
 (r tnetnte, ba tdf) e3 ntd^t fyabe tun tonnen. 
 He thought that I could not have done it. 
 
 %tf) glaube, ba er bt jetjt bie (Sd^ulb rairb l)aben be^afylen muffen. 
 I believe that by this time he will have been obliged to pay the debt. 
 
90 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 297. In concessive clauses the order may be either inverteu or 
 normal ; but if a conjunction, relative pronoun, or conjunctive 
 adverb is expressed, the transposed order occurs. The principal 
 clause may take either the normal or the inverted order. 
 
 6ei ber 93erg aud() nod) fo fyodfj, "i 
 
 er 33erg fei audf) nod) fo fyod), Ud)beftetgetl)n,orbeftetgetd)t)n. 
 
 SBenn ber 33erg aud) nod) f o fyod) fet, J 
 
 Though the mountain be ever so high, I shall ascend it. 
 
 SBo ber 33erg audf) liege, i$ befteige ifyn, or befteige id) ifyn. 
 Wherever the mountain may be situated, I shall ascend it. 
 
 2Beid)e 3Sorurtei(e man audfj gegen tfyn Ijege, rairb er bodj fein 3^^ 
 
 erreid^en. 
 Whatever prejudices people may foster against him, nevertheless he 
 
 will accomplish his purpose. 
 
 298. The conjunctions unb, aber, allein, fonbern, benn, and ober 
 do not affect the order. 
 
 299. A relative pronoun is generally not separated from its 
 antecedent. 
 
 300. The indirect object usually precedes the direct object if 
 both are nouns, unless the former is modified by a relative clause 
 or it is desired to emphasize the latter. 
 
 3d) gab bem Sefyrer ba 33ud(j. 
 
 I gave the teacher the book. 
 
 3>dj gab bag Sudf) bem Setter, ber in biefem Banter roar. 
 
 I gave the book to the teacher who was in this room. 
 
 301. If both objects are personal pronouns, the direct object 
 generally precedes the indirect. The datives mir and bir are often 
 followed by e : mir'3, bir'3. 
 
 @ic fyat eine 5tofe. $<$ fyabe fie tfyr gegeben. 
 She has a rose. I gave it to her, 
 Sie twrb fie ^fynen geben. 
 She will give it to you. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS 91 
 
 302. An indirect pronoun object precedes a direct noun object. 
 
 3d) fyabe ifyr bie ^Rofe gegeben. 
 I gave her the rose. 
 
 303. Adverbs do not stand between the subject and the personal 
 verb in principal clauses. Exceptions : alfo, inbefjen, namlid:), groat. 
 
 @r fpricfyt oft t)on $fynen. 
 He often speaks of you. 
 
 (Sie fingt nie. 
 She never sings. 
 
 )er 33rief alfo ift nidjt angefommen. 
 So the letter was not received. 
 
 304. Separable prefixes stand at the end of the clause. 
 
 @r ftefyt jeben 5Korgen urn fiinf UE)r auf. 
 He gets up every morning at five o'clock. 
 
 305. If there are several adverbs in a sentence, the order usually 
 is time, place, manner, cause, purpose. 
 
 (r ift fyeute fjter. 
 He is here to-day. 
 
 @r ift geftern fd)nell nadj aufe gelommen. 
 He hurried home yesterday. 
 
 306. Adverbial phrases follow simple adverbs. 
 
 Ste fyatte ftdj t>orn in ben Safyn gefe^t. 
 
 She had seated herself in the front of the boat. 
 
 307. Adverbs of time precede the direct object when it is a noun, 
 and follow it when it is a pronoun. 
 
 JBir fyaben fyeute eine lange 3lufgabe. 
 We have a long lesson to-day. 
 
 r fyat mid) fyeute befud^t. 
 He called on me to-day. 
 
92 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 308. The negative nid)t stands after a direct object. It precedes 
 predicate adjectives, participles, and infinitives. Other positions are 
 determined by meaning. 
 
 $d) fenne ben SUlann nidljt. 
 
 / do not know the man. 
 
 (r ift nicfyt Irani. 
 
 He is not sick. 
 
 @ie ift nicfyt gefommen. 
 
 She did not come. 
 
 309. Present and perfect infinitives, perfect participles, and sep- 
 arable prefixes (251) stand at the end of the clause. 
 
 @ie roirb ein beutfdfjeS Sieb fingen, she will sing a German song. 
 <5ie Ttnrb ein beutfcfyeg 2ieb gefungen fyaben, she will have sung a 
 
 German song. 
 
 ie fyat ein beutfcfyeS Sieb gefungen, she has sung a German song. 
 aite.fie ein beittfdjeS Sieb gefungen ? Had she sung a German song? 
 (r marf)t bie Xiir auf , he is opening the door. 
 
 NOTE. In a dependent clause the separable prefix and the present or 
 imperfect of the verb meet and are joined. 
 
 3<i) bacfjte, bafj er bie Xiir aufmatf)te. 
 I thought he was opening the door. 
 
 310. The infinitive with gu is preceded by all of its modifiers. 
 If unmodified, it may be included within the clause of which it 
 forms an adjunct, but usually it follows. When modified it regu- 
 larly stands outside of the clause. 
 
 Siefe Slufgabe lernen ju miiffen, mad)t mir leine $reube, to be obliged 
 to learn this lesson does not make me feel happy. 
 
 @ie fjat fid) entfdjloffen, ein beutfcfyeS Sieb u fingen, she has decided 
 to sing a German song. 
 
 <5ie fing an gu fingen, or @ie fing 511 fingen an, she began to sing. 
 
 @r l)at mir etroa^ u iun gegeben, he gave me something to do. 
 
 (Sr ift an mir t)orbeigegangen, o^ne mid^ gefefyen u Fjaben, he passed 
 by me without having seen me. 
 
VOWEL GRADATION 93 
 
 VOWEL GRADATION 
 
 311. Strong verbs have vowel change in their principal parts. 
 The vowel of the imperfect stem is never like that of the infinitive. 
 The vowel of the past participle may be like that of the infinitive 
 or of the imperfect stem, or it may be different from either. This 
 change of vowel in the principal parts is called vowel gradation. 
 
 312. CLASS I. i. Gradation ei i i. 
 
 beifsen, bifc, gebifjen 
 reiten, ritt, geritten 
 
 Membership : All strong verbs with ei plus d), f, , and t, and 
 leiben and fcfyneiben. Exception : fyeif$en. 
 2. Gradation ei ie ie. 
 
 bleiben, blieb, geblieben 
 
 Membership : All strong verbs with ei except those belonging to 
 Class I, i and fyeiften. 
 
 313. CLASS II. Gradation ie o o. 
 
 fliegen, flog, geflogen 
 fltefcen, flojj, geflo|en 
 
 Membership : All strong verbs with ie (except liegen), besides a 
 few that do not have ie in the infinitive and which are given in 
 the following list. The o is short in the imperfect and past parti- 
 ciple when it is followed by two or more consonants (6), otherwise 
 it is long. 
 
 beroegen 
 
 brefdjen 
 
 fd)melen 
 
 fdjaKen 
 
 gciren 
 
 liiren 
 
 fyeben 
 
 fedjten 
 
 fd)tx>eflett 
 
 jaufen 
 
 fd(jtt)tiren 
 
 liigen 
 
 pflegen 
 
 flecfyten 
 
 glimmen 
 
 faugen 
 
 tt)dgen 
 
 iriigen 
 
 fd^eren 
 
 ntelten 
 
 flimmen 
 
 fd^nauben 
 
 Iofd)en 
 
 
 roeben 
 
 quetten 
 
 
 fd^rauben 
 
 f(|n)oren 
 
 
 SLugenb befteljt. 
 3eber ift feine^ liicfeS d^mieb. 
 
94 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 314. CLASS III. i. Gradation i a u. 
 
 binben, banb, gebunben 
 
 Membership : All strong verbs with i plus nb, ng, and nl. 
 
 2 . Gradation i a o . 
 
 begtnnen, begann, begonnen 
 
 Membership: The following verbs with i plus nn, and fdfyrotmnten : 
 begtnnen, getmnnen, rinnen, finnen, fptnnen. 
 
 3. Gradation e a o. 
 
 fyelfen, fyalf, gefyolfen 
 
 Membership: bergen, berften, gelten, fyelfen, fdjelten, fterben, t)er* 
 berben, roerben, roerfen. 
 
 315. CLASS IV. Gradation e a o. 
 
 fpredfjen, fpracfy, gefprocfyen 
 
 Membership: befefylen, bredfjen, empfetylen, nefymen, fd^redten, jpre- 
 d^en, fted^en, ftefylen, treffen, treten. 
 
 316. CLASS V. Gradation e a e. 
 
 fel)en, faf), gefe^en 
 
 Membership : All strong verbs with e except those belonging to 
 Class III, 3 and to Class IV. The verbs bitten, bat, gebeten ; Itegen, 
 lag, gelegen ; and fi|en, faj$, gefeffen, also belong here. 
 
 317. CLASS VI. Gradation a u a. 
 
 fasten, fufyr, gefafyren 
 
 Membership : badten, fasten, graben, laben, fd^aff en, frf)Iagen, tragen, 
 wad^fen, raafd^en, and ftefyen, ftanb, geftanben. 
 
 318. CLASS VII. Gradation a te a. 
 
 fyalten, Ijielt, ge^alten 
 
 Membership: blafen, braten, fatten, Ejalten, lafjen, raten, fd)lafen, 
 and l)auen, ^ieb, gefyauen; laufen, lief, gelaufen; rufen, tief, gerufen; 
 ^ei^en, ^ie^, ge^ei^en ; ftofcen, ftie^, gefio^en ; fangen, fing, gefangen ; 
 ^angen, tying, getyangen ; and getyen, ging, gegangen. 
 
LIST OF STRONG VERBS 
 
 LIST OF STRONG VERBS 
 
 95 
 
 319. The following list of strong verbs is meant to contain those 
 which are regularly strong, and also such as have weak forms. The 
 imperfect subjunctive, when irregular, is given below the imperfect 
 indicative. A number of strong verbs are omitted in this list, but 
 they may be found under 320. 
 
 NOTE. For the vowel of the present indicative see 232-236. 
 
 befefylen 
 
 befall 
 
 befo^Ien 
 
 command 
 
 
 before 
 
 
 
 fidj befleifjen 
 
 beflifc fu$ 
 
 ftdj beflifjen 
 
 apply one's self 
 
 beginnen 
 
 begann 
 
 begonnen 
 
 begin 
 
 
 begimne 
 
 
 
 beifsen 
 
 bife 
 
 gebiffen 
 
 bite 
 
 bergen 
 
 barg 
 
 geborgen 
 
 hide 
 
 
 biirge or barge 
 
 
 
 berften x 
 
 barft 
 
 geborften 
 
 burst 
 
 betriigen 
 
 betrog 
 
 betrogen 
 
 cheat 
 
 biegen 
 
 bog 
 
 gebogen 
 
 bend 
 
 bieten 
 
 bot 
 
 geboten 
 
 offer 
 
 btnben 
 
 banb 
 
 gebunben 
 
 bind 
 
 bitten 
 
 bat 
 
 gebeten 
 
 ask 
 
 blafen 
 
 blie 
 
 geblafen 
 
 blow 
 
 bletben 
 
 blieb 
 
 geblieben 
 
 remain 
 
 braten 2 
 
 bratete (briet) 
 
 gebraten 
 
 roast 
 
 bred)en 
 
 brad) 
 
 gebrod^en 
 
 break 
 
 bingen 8 
 
 (bang) 
 
 gebungen 
 
 hire 
 
 brefdjen 
 
 brof^ (brafd^) 
 
 gebrofdjen 
 
 thresh 
 
 brtngen 
 
 brang 
 
 gebrungen 
 
 press 
 
 empfefylen 
 
 empfafyl 
 
 empfo^Ien 
 
 recommend 
 
 
 empfbt)le 
 
 
 
 erlbfcfyen 
 
 etlofd^ 
 
 erlofdjen 
 
 go out (of a light 
 
 1 Sometimes weak. 2 Present sometimes weak. 8 Generally weak. 
 
HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 erfdjreden 
 
 erfd^raf 
 
 erjd^rodten 
 
 be afraid 
 
 efjen 
 
 ^ 
 
 gegefjen 
 
 eat 
 
 fasten 
 
 fu^r 
 
 gefa^ren 
 
 go, drive 
 
 fallen 
 
 fiel 
 
 gefallen 
 
 fall 
 
 fangen 
 
 ffo 
 
 gefangen 
 
 catch 
 
 f ed)ten l 
 
 fod|t 
 
 gefod^ten 
 
 fight 
 
 finben 
 
 fanb 
 
 gefunben 
 
 find 
 
 fled&ten * 
 
 Pod|t 
 
 geflodfjten 
 
 braid 
 
 *- _ i k 
 
 fliegen 
 
 flog 
 
 geflogen 
 
 fly 
 
 flieljen 
 
 fto| 
 
 geflo^en 
 
 flee 
 
 fliefsen 
 
 W 
 
 geflofjen 
 
 fiow 
 
 freffen 
 
 fra^ 
 
 gefrefjen 
 
 devour 
 
 frieren 
 
 fror 
 
 gefroren 
 
 freeze 
 
 gebaren 2 
 
 gebar 
 
 geboren 
 
 bear 
 
 geben 
 
 gab 
 
 gegeben 
 
 give 
 
 gebetfyen 
 
 gebieJ) 
 
 gebieE)en 
 
 thrive 
 
 gefjen 
 
 9^9 
 
 gegangen 
 
 go 
 
 gelmgen 
 
 gelang 
 
 gelungen 
 
 succeed 
 
 geiten 
 
 gait 
 
 gegolten 
 
 be worth 
 
 
 golte 
 
 
 
 genefen 
 
 genaS 
 
 genefen 
 
 recover 
 
 genie^en 
 
 geno^ 
 
 genoffen 
 
 enjoy 
 
 gefcfyefjen 
 
 gefd^a^ 
 
 gefdje^en 
 
 happen 
 
 getDtnnen 
 
 geroann 
 
 geroonnen 
 
 win 
 
 
 gerobnne 
 
 
 
 giefeen 
 
 90^ 
 
 gegoflen 
 
 pour 
 
 gleid^en 
 
 glid^ 
 
 gegli($en 
 
 be like 
 
 gleiten l 
 
 glitt 
 
 geglitten 
 
 glide 
 
 glimmen l 
 
 glomm 
 
 geglommen 
 
 glimmer 
 
 graben 
 
 grub 
 
 gegraben 
 
 dig 
 
 gteifen 
 
 8ff 
 
 gegriffen 
 
 seize 
 
 Ijalten 
 
 E)ielt 
 
 geJ)aIten 
 
 hold 
 
 1 Sometimes weak. 
 
 2 3$ gefctire, bu geMerft (gebcirft), fie gebiert (gebcirt). 
 
LIST OF STRONG VERBS 
 
 97 
 
 ^hauen 
 
 l)ieb 
 
 ge^auen 
 
 hew 
 
 VT^eben 
 
 ^ob 
 
 gefyoben 
 
 raise 
 
 Ijeiften 
 
 l)ie^ 
 
 gel)ei^en 
 
 be called 
 
 fjelfen 
 
 ^alf 
 
 ge^olfen 
 
 help 
 
 Jiefen * | 
 ^liiren J 
 
 lor 
 
 geloren 
 
 choose 
 
 f limtnen l 
 
 llomm 
 
 gellommen 
 
 climb 
 
 Ilingen l 
 
 Hang 
 
 gellungen 
 
 sound 
 
 Ineifen 
 
 Iniff 
 
 gelniffen 
 
 pinch 
 
 lommen 
 
 lam 
 
 gelommen 
 
 come 
 
 Ireifd^en l 
 
 (Irifrf)) 
 
 gelrifd^en 
 
 scream 
 
 v'friecljen 
 
 Irod^ 
 
 gelrod^en 
 
 creep 
 
 laben 2 
 
 lub 
 
 gelaben 
 
 load, invite 
 
 lafjen 
 
 lie^ 
 
 gelaffen 
 
 let 
 
 laufen 8 
 
 lief 
 
 gelaufen 
 
 run 
 
 leiben 
 
 litt 
 
 gelitten 
 
 suffer 
 
 leifyen 
 
 lid) 
 
 geliefjen 
 
 lend 
 
 lefen 
 
 Ia 
 
 gelefen 
 
 read 
 
 liegen 
 
 lag 
 
 gelegen 
 
 lie 
 
 Ibfdjen 1 ' 4 
 
 loft 
 
 gelofd^en 
 
 (go out, put out, 
 \ quench (thirst) 
 
 liigen 
 
 log 
 
 gelogen 
 
 lie 
 
 . mafylen 5 
 
 ma^lte 
 
 gema^len 
 
 grind 
 
 meiben 
 
 ntieb 
 
 gemieben 
 
 shun 
 
 mellen l 
 
 moll 
 
 gemollen 
 
 milk 
 
 meffen 
 
 ma 
 
 gemefjen 
 
 measure 
 
 mij^lingen 
 
 mi^lang 
 
 mi^lungen 
 
 fail 
 
 nefymen 
 
 na^m 
 
 genommen 
 
 take 
 
 pfeifen 
 
 Pfiff 
 
 gepfiffen 
 
 whistle 
 
 preifen l 
 
 prie 
 
 gepriefen 
 
 praise 
 
 raten 
 
 riet 
 
 geraten 
 
 advise 
 
 teiben 
 
 rieb 
 
 gerieben 
 
 rub 
 
 1 Sometimes 
 
 weak. 2 
 
 Sometimes weak in present, 
 
 3 See 233. 
 
 4 bu lifd^eft, er lifd&t. 6 
 
 Now always weak except in 
 
 participle. 
 
9 8 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 reifcen 
 
 ti^ 
 
 gerifjen 
 
 tear 
 
 tetien 
 
 ritt 
 
 gerttten 
 
 ride 
 
 tied^en 
 
 rod^ 
 
 gerod^en 
 
 smell 
 
 ringen 
 
 tang 
 
 gerungen 
 
 wrestle 
 
 tinnen 
 
 tann 
 
 geronnen 
 
 run 
 
 tufen 
 
 rtef 
 
 gerufen 
 
 call 
 
 jalgen l 
 
 fatye 
 
 gefalgen 
 
 salt 
 
 faufen 2 ' 5 
 
 foff 
 
 gefoffen 
 
 drink 
 
 faugen 
 
 fog 
 
 gefogen 
 
 suck 
 
 jdjallen 8 
 
 (f^oB) 
 
 (gefd^oUen) 
 
 sound 
 
 fdfyeiben 
 
 j^ieb 
 
 gefc^ieben 
 
 part 
 
 jcfyetnen 
 
 fd&ten 
 
 gefd^ienen 
 
 shine 
 
 fcfyelten 
 
 Walt 
 
 gefd^olten 
 
 scold 
 
 
 polite ornate 
 
 
 
 fcfyieben 
 
 fd)ob 
 
 gefd^oben 
 
 shove 
 
 fcfyiefcen 
 
 fd^o| 
 
 gefdjofjen 
 
 shoot 
 
 fdfjinben 
 
 fdfjanb 
 
 gefd^unben 
 
 flay 
 
 fdfylafen 
 
 fd^Iief 
 
 gefd)lafen 
 
 sleep 
 
 fdf)lagen 
 
 Wlug 
 
 gefd^lagen 
 
 strike 
 
 ^letd^en 
 
 f Cult CD 
 
 gefd^Iid)en 
 
 creep 
 
 fcpefcen 
 
 fdnlo B 
 
 gef^Iofjen 
 
 shut 
 
 jd^lingen 
 
 Wang 
 
 gefd^Iungen 
 
 sling 
 
 fd^mei^en 
 
 frf)mtj$ 
 
 gefd^miffen 
 
 dash 
 
 fdfjnauben 4 
 
 fd^nob 
 
 gefdjnoben 
 
 snort 
 
 jdfjneiben 
 
 fd^nitt 
 
 gefd^nttten 
 
 cut 
 
 jd^tauben 4 
 
 fd^rob 
 
 gefcfyroben 
 
 screw 
 
 fd^reiben 
 
 fcfyrieb 
 
 gefd^rieben 
 
 write 
 
 fd^reien 
 
 jd^rie 
 
 gefd)tten 
 
 cry 
 
 fcfyretten 
 
 f^rttt 
 
 gefd^ritten 
 
 stride 
 
 fdjroten l 
 
 fd^rotete 
 
 gefd^roten 
 
 grind 
 
 fd)tt)dren 
 
 fd^roor (fcfyrtwr) 
 
 gefdfyrooren 
 
 fester 
 
 1 Now always weak except in participle. 2 Sometimes weak in present. 
 8 Present now always weak, and other forms generally weak. 4 Usually 
 weak. & See 233. 
 
fdjtDetgen 
 fdfjnnmmen 
 
 fcfyttnnben 
 
 fcfyromgen 
 
 fdfjrooren 
 
 fe&en 
 
 fein 
 
 fieben 1 
 
 fingen 
 
 finlen 
 
 finnen 
 
 fi^en 
 
 fpalten 2 
 
 fpeien 8 
 
 fpinnen 
 
 fpredjen 
 
 fprtefjen 
 
 jpringen 
 
 ftedjen 
 
 ftecf en l 
 
 ftefyen 
 
 [tel)Ien 
 
 fteigen 
 
 fterben 
 
 ftteben 
 
 fttnfen 
 
 fio^en 4 
 
 ftreid)en 
 
 ftteiten 
 
 tragen 
 
 treffen 
 
 fd^roamm 
 
 fdjroomme 
 
 fd)tDanb 
 
 LIST OF STRONG VERBS 99 
 
 gefd)ttnegen be silent 
 
 gefd)tt>ommen swim 
 
 gefd^rounben vanish 
 
 gejd^tDungen swing 
 
 gefd^rt)oren swear 
 
 gefefyen see 
 
 geroefen be 
 
 gefotten boil 
 
 gefungen sing 
 
 gefunlen sink 
 
 gefonnen think 
 
 gefefjen sit 
 
 gefp alien split 
 
 gefpien spit 
 
 gefponnen spin 
 
 gefprocfyen speak 
 
 gefprofjen sprout 
 
 gefprungen ' spring 
 
 gefiodjen prick 
 
 (geftodten) stick 
 
 gefianben stand 
 
 gefio^len steal 
 
 gefttegen climb 
 
 gefiorben die 
 
 geftoben scatter 
 
 geftunfen stink 
 
 geftoben push 
 
 geftrtdjen stroke 
 
 geftritten contejid 
 
 getragen carry 
 
 getroffen hit 
 
 Some- 
 
 fd^raur 
 
 fa| 
 
 roar 
 
 (fott) 
 
 fang 
 
 fanl 
 
 fann 
 
 fa* 
 
 fpaltete 
 
 jpie 
 
 fpann 
 
 fprofe 
 
 fprang 
 
 [tad) 
 
 ftaf 
 
 ftanb 
 
 ftteg 
 ftarb 
 ftob 
 ftan! 
 
 ftrtc^ 
 ftritt 
 trug 
 traf 
 
 1 Usually weak. 2 Now always weak except in participle, 
 times weak. 4 See 233. 
 
IOO 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 tretben 
 
 trieb 
 
 getrieben 
 
 drive 
 
 treten 
 
 ttat 
 
 getreten 
 
 tread 
 
 triefen l 
 
 (troff) 
 
 getroffen 
 
 drip 
 
 trinlen 
 
 tranf 
 
 getrunlen 
 
 drink 
 
 trugen 
 
 trog 
 
 getrogen 
 
 deceive 
 
 tun 
 
 tat 
 
 getan 
 
 do 
 
 nerberben 
 
 Derbarb 
 
 t)erborben 
 
 spoil 
 
 
 t>erburbe 
 
 
 
 nerbrtejsen 
 
 t>erbro^ 
 
 t>erbrofjen 
 
 vex 
 
 nergeffen 
 
 Derga^ 
 
 t)ergefjen 
 
 forget 
 
 t>erlieren 
 
 Derlor 
 
 t)erloren 
 
 lose 
 
 raad)fen 
 
 rauc^S 
 
 geraad^fen 
 
 grow 
 
 raagen 2 
 
 n>og 
 
 geraogen 
 
 f weigh (with 
 \ the mind} 
 
 raafd)en 
 
 raufd^ 
 
 geraafd^en 
 
 wash 
 
 raeben 1 
 
 raob 
 
 geraoben 
 
 weave 
 
 raeidjen 
 
 nridf) 
 
 geraidfjen 
 
 yield 
 
 raeifen 
 
 rates 
 
 geraiefen 
 
 show 
 
 raerben 
 
 raarb 
 
 geraorben 
 
 sue 
 
 raerben 
 
 raurbe (raarb) 
 
 geraorben 
 
 become 
 
 raerfen 
 
 raarf 
 
 geraorfen 
 
 throw 
 
 nriegen 3 
 
 raog 
 
 geraogen 
 
 weigh 
 
 nrinben 
 
 raanb 
 
 geraunben 
 
 wind 
 
 gei^en 
 
 gie^ 
 
 ge^te^en 
 
 accuse 
 
 gieljen 
 
 gog 
 
 ge^ogen 
 
 draw 
 
 graingen 
 
 graang 
 
 getpungen 
 
 force 
 
 (Exprtcfyrobrter. unget ift ber befte 
 
 SReben ift ilber, d^raeigen ift olb. 
 S3er anbern eine rube grabt, fatlt felbft 
 2^ue 5ted()t unb fd)eue ntemanb. 
 2Ber ott t)ertraut, ^at tt)ol)l gebaut. 
 
 1 Usually weak. 2 SBagen is transitive and is used figuratively ; nriegett 
 is both transitive and intransitive, and has a literal meaning. 3 "See 
 
LIST OF STRONG VERBS 
 
 DIFFERENTIATION OF CERTAIN VERBS 
 320. List I. 
 
 101 
 
 badfen 
 
 barfte (buf) 
 
 gebadten 
 
 bake 
 
 bacfen 
 
 badtie 
 
 gebadtt 
 
 stick\ take. 
 
 erbletdfjen 
 
 erbltd^ 
 
 erbltd^en 
 
 die' ' ; 
 
 erbletdfjen 
 
 erbletd^te 
 
 erblei($t 
 
 tur,i pale 
 
 erfrfjrecfen 
 
 erfd^raf 
 
 erfdjrorfen 
 
 be terrified 
 
 erfdjjredEen 
 
 erfdjredfte 
 
 erfd^rerft 
 
 terrify 
 
 gdren 
 
 gor 
 
 gegoren (lit.) 
 
 ferment 
 
 gdren 
 
 gdrte 
 
 gegdrt (fig.) 
 
 ferment 
 
 fyangen "1 
 pngen / 
 
 ^ing 
 
 gefjangen (intr.) 1 
 
 hang 
 
 fjdngen 
 
 ^dngte (E)ing) 
 
 gef)dngt (geljangen) hang 
 
 
 
 (trans.) 
 
 
 pflegen 
 
 pfbg (pflag) 
 
 gepflogen 
 
 carry on, manage 
 
 pflegen 
 
 pflegie 
 
 gepflegt 
 
 nurse, be accustomed 
 
 f($affen 2 
 
 fd^uf 
 
 gefd^affen 
 
 create, produce 
 
 fdjaffen 
 
 Wafftc 
 
 gefcfjafft 
 
 remove, work, procure 
 
 fdfjeren 
 
 fc^or 
 
 gefd^oren 
 
 shear 
 
 fcfjeren 3 
 
 fd>erte 
 
 gefdjert 
 
 r concern, bother (impv. 
 i ^ off} 
 
 fdfyletfen 
 
 Bff 
 
 gef^liffen 
 
 grind 
 
 fdjleifen 
 
 f^Ieifte 
 
 gef^Ieift 
 
 drag 
 
 fdfjtnel^en 3 
 
 Wmolj 4 
 
 gefdfjmolgen (intr.) 
 
 melt 
 
 fd^melen 
 
 fd^melgte 
 
 gefd^mel^t (trans.) 
 
 melt 
 
 fd)tt)eEen 
 
 fd^n)oQ 
 
 gefd^raoEen (intr.) 
 
 swell 
 
 fdf)tt)eEen 
 
 fd^rueEte 
 
 gejrf)tt)eEt (trans.) 
 
 swell 
 
 t)ern)irren 
 
 t)errairrte 
 
 Derraorren 
 
 be confused 
 
 flerroirren 
 
 Dertwrrte 
 
 t)ern)irrt (trans.) 
 
 confuse 
 
 radgen 5 
 
 raog 
 
 geroogen 
 
 weigh (with the mind] 
 
 rategen 5 
 
 raog 
 
 geraogen 
 
 weigh 
 
 raiegen 
 
 raiegte 
 
 gerategt 
 
 rock 
 
 1 Sometimes also transitive 
 
 . 2 See 233. 3 Present both strong and weak. 
 
 4 Sometimes 
 
 transitive. 5 See p. 100, note 2. 
 
102 HAN] 
 
 DBOOK ( 
 
 321. List II. 
 
 
 beten 
 
 betete 
 
 bieten 
 
 bot 
 
 bitten 
 
 \ bat 
 
 bredjen 
 
 brad) 
 
 brings 
 
 . btad^te 
 
 banfen 
 
 banfte 
 
 benlen 
 
 bad^te 
 
 fliegen 
 
 flog 
 
 fliefyen 
 
 w 
 
 genefen 
 
 genag 
 
 geniejjen 
 
 aenoR 
 
 fyauen 
 
 nieb 
 
 fyeben 
 
 l)ob 
 
 fennen 
 
 fannte 
 
 fonnen 
 
 lonnte 
 
 ieiben 
 
 litt 
 
 leiten 
 
 leitete 
 
 legen 
 
 legte 
 
 liegen 
 
 lag 
 
 lugen 
 
 log 
 
 madden 
 
 madfjte 
 
 mogen 
 
 ntodfjte 
 
 fe^en 
 
 fc^tc 
 
 gebetet 
 
 geboten 
 
 gebeten 
 
 gebrod^en 
 
 gebrad^t 
 
 gebanlt 
 
 geflogen 
 
 gcflo^cn 
 
 genefen 
 
 genofjen 
 
 ge^auen 
 
 ge^oben 
 
 gelannt 
 
 gefonnt 
 
 gelitten 
 
 geleitet 
 
 gelegt 
 
 gelegen 
 
 gelogen 
 
 gemad^t 
 
 gemod^t 
 
 gefe^t 
 
 gefefjen 
 
 genwdfjfen 
 
 geraafd^en 
 
 pray 
 
 offer 
 ask 
 
 break 
 bring 
 thank 
 think 
 
 fly 
 
 flee 
 
 recover 
 
 enjoy 
 
 hew 
 
 raise 
 
 know 
 
 be able 
 
 suffer 
 
 lead 
 
 lay 
 
 lie 
 
 lie 
 
 make 
 
 like, may 
 
 place, set 
 
 sit 
 
 grow 
 
 wash 
 
 SRedjjt unb Siebe 
 
 fagt: ,,3ebem ba3 eine! 
 SDie Siebe: ,,3ebem ba 5Deine!" 
 
STRONG NOUNS WITH VOWEL MUTATION 103 
 
 in ber 2Belt Itifct fid) ertragen, 
 nicf)t eine Seifye t>on fd)5rten agen. 
 
 STRONG NOUNS WITH VOWEL MUTATION 1 
 
 MONOSYLLABLES 
 
 322. Masculines with plural in C+ 
 
 ber Slbt 
 ber 3lrgt 
 ber 21ft 
 ber Sad) 
 ber Satt 
 ber Sart 
 ber Saum tree 
 
 abbot 
 physician 
 
 ball 
 
 ber 33otf he-goat 
 ber Sraud) custom 
 ber 33rud) fracture 
 ber Sunb alliance 
 ber Sufd) 
 ber SDamm < 
 ber 
 
 ber uft 
 ber unft 
 ber gall 
 ber glofy 
 ber glud) 
 ber glug 
 ber glujs 
 ber grofd) 
 ber 
 ber 
 
 fragrance 
 
 rver 
 
 ber ang walk 
 ber aft guest 
 ber aul horse 
 ber runb mww 
 ber rujj greeting 
 bet U^ casting 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 ber, 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 ber Samm comb 
 
 ber Sampf combat 
 
 ber Sauf purchase 
 
 ber Sau brown owl 
 
 ber Slang sound 
 
 ber SI of; dumpling 
 
 ber Slo$ 
 
 ber Snauf 
 
 ber Snopf button 
 
 ber Snuft 
 
 ber Sod) 
 
 ber Sopf 
 
 ber Sorb basket 
 
 ber Srampf <mzw/ 
 
 ber Sran 
 ber Sran 
 ber Sropf 
 ber Srug 
 ber Su 
 ber a 
 ber Sauf 
 ber So^n 
 ber Sfarft 
 ber 9J?arfd^ 
 ber 9ftop3 
 ber 3Japf 
 ber ^5apft 
 ber $af$ 
 ber $fa^l 
 ber ^flocf 
 ber Spflug 
 ber ^fropf 
 ber 
 ber 
 ber 
 ber $uff 
 ber 9Rang 
 ber Sat 
 ber 3Raud) 
 
 wreath 
 
 pitcher 
 
 kiss 
 
 corset, bib 
 
 course 
 
 reward 
 
 market 
 
 pope 
 
 cork 
 
 place 
 
 thump 
 rank 
 councilor 
 smoke 
 
 1 Nouns of infrequent occurrence have been omitted in these lists. 
 
104 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 bet 3Raum space bet d()0f$ lap foi&imm^ stocking 
 
 (intoxi- bet d)tant case bet ttunl stump 
 bet $iau|db \ . ~~ . , - , ~. r/ . 
 L <r<2/z0/2 bet dtjtunb deft bet tufyi flfer 
 
 bet Sodf #?#/ bet dfyitb /^^ bet tutrtpf stump 
 (trunk bet d)UJ3 shot bet tutm ^rw 
 
 bet SRumpf J (<?///^ 
 
 betd^n)amm sponge 
 
 bet turg /// 
 
 Uttfy) 
 
 bet rf)ttmnt prank 
 
 bet umpf swamp 
 
 bet aal room 
 
 bet d^raang to'/ 
 
 bet Sanj dance 
 
 bet act sack 
 
 bet dfjrcwtm swarm 
 
 bet Son /^^^ 
 
 bet aft /#/<# 
 
 bet d)TX)u(ft swelling 
 
 bet Sopf /<?/ 
 
 bet atg coffin 
 
 bet d^tDung swing 
 
 bet Sotf /^^/" 
 
 bet a sentence 
 
 bet d^rout ^M 
 
 bet Stanf drink 
 
 bet aum ^<?/ra 
 
 bet of)n jtf 
 
 bet Xtaum dream 
 
 bet cfyaft shaft 
 
 bet pan shaving 
 
 bet ^tog trough 
 
 bet dj)a treasure 
 
 bet pa^ y'<?^ 
 
 bet Ztopf simpleton 
 
 bet djaimt /^w 
 
 bet ptud^ saying 
 
 bet Xutm /^w<fr 
 
 r /^w//^ 
 
 bet ptung y>/w/ 
 
 bet 33ogt governor 
 
 bet d)Iaf \ (of the 
 
 bet punb bung 
 
 bet 2BaH rampart 
 
 [head} 
 
 bet tab j/^ 
 
 bet SBanft paunch 
 
 ber djlag blow 
 
 bet tall stable 
 
 bet SBoIf w^ 
 
 tf (leather 
 betdblaudb-l . 
 L ^^ 
 
 bet tamm /r/^^ 
 bet tanb rank 
 
 bet 2Bud^ growth 
 
 bet d)Iunb chasm 
 
 bet totf stick, cane 
 
 bet SButf throw 
 
 bet d^Iutf ^-^ 
 
 bet totdf) ^r> 
 
 bet 3 a ^ n ^^ 
 
 bet d)iuj$ close 
 
 bet td push, pile 
 
 bet 3^m M'^ 
 
 bet d^mau y^^^/ 
 
 bet ttang r^ 
 
 bet Sftun y^^r^ 
 
 bet djnapio whisky 
 
 bet ttaudj bush 
 
 bet ,3^ /^// 
 
 bet d^opf tuft 
 
 bet ttom stream 
 
 bet Spf cue 
 
 
 
 bet 3^Q train 
 
 323. Masculines with plural in et. 
 
 bet ott ^-^ 
 
 "bet Dtt //^r^v? 
 
 bet2Balb forest 
 
 bet SRann man 
 
 bet Stanb ^^ 
 
 bet 2Butm worm 
 
 NOTE. Only two nonmutatable masculine monosyllables, bet eift, spirit, 
 and bet Seifc, body, take et in the plural. 
 
STRONG NOUNS WITH VOWEL MUTATION 105 
 324. Feminines with plural in e. 
 
 bie 3lngft 
 bie Slri 
 bie 33anf 
 bie 33runft 
 bie SBruft 
 bie gauft 
 
 anxiety 
 ax 
 bench 
 fire, lust 
 
 fist 
 
 bie Sluft deft 
 bie $taft strength 
 bie $ufy cow 
 bie Sunft art 
 bie Saug louse 
 bie Suft air 
 
 bie 3Jal)t 
 bie 3lot 
 bie 5tu^ 
 bie @au 
 bie Scfylucljt 
 bie d^nur 
 
 nut 
 sow 
 cleft 
 
 bie grud)t 
 
 fruit 
 
 bie Suft pleasure 
 
 bie tabt 
 
 city 
 
 bie ang 
 
 goose 
 
 bie 3Jlad^t might 
 
 bie ud^t 
 
 malady 
 
 bie tuft 
 
 vault 
 
 bie 3Jlagb servant girl 
 
 bie 2Banb 
 
 wall 
 
 bie anb 
 
 hand 
 
 bie 3ftaug mouse 
 
 bie 2Burft 
 
 sausage 
 
 bie aut 
 
 skin 
 
 bie5Ra$t *#/ 
 
 bie 3^ft 
 
 guild 
 
 325. Neuters with 
 
 plural in Cf * 
 
 
 
 bag 3lag 
 
 carcass 
 
 bag rag ^T^JJ 
 
 bag Sod) 
 
 hole 
 
 bag 2lmt 
 
 office 
 
 bag ut property 
 
 bag 3Waul 
 
 mouth 
 
 bag Sab 
 
 bath 
 
 bag aupt head 
 
 bag ^Pfanb 
 
 pledge 
 
 bag Slatt 
 
 leaf 
 
 bag aug /^w^ 
 
 bag 5Rab 
 
 wheel 
 
 bag 33ud) 
 
 book 
 
 bag olj a/^// 
 
 bag d^lo^ 
 
 castle 
 
 bag 3)ad) 
 
 roof 
 
 bag orn ^<?^^ 
 
 bag Sal 
 
 valley 
 
 bag SDorf 
 
 village 
 
 bag llE)tt chicken 
 
 bag Sud) 
 
 cloth 
 
 bag $&$) 
 
 compartment bag Salb calf 
 
 bag Soil 
 
 people 
 
 bag $a$ 
 
 barrel 
 
 bag orn grain 
 
 bag 2Bamg 
 
 waistcoa 
 
 bag lag 
 
 glass 
 
 bag $raitt ^^ 
 
 
 
 bag tab 
 
 grave 
 
 bag Samm /0aw 
 
 
 
 326. Neuters with plural in C. 
 
 bag 6^ or <r^<?/r {part of a church) 
 
 bag 
 
 raft 
 
 gern nod^ Idnger beg Setters Siirben, 
 SBenn driller nur nid)t gleic^ Secret raurben. 
 
 oetlje 
 
106 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 POLYSYLLABLES 
 
 327. Masculines in el, Ctt, er, with no additional ending in the 
 plural. 
 
 bet 3ldt er field ber afen harbor bet Dfen stove 
 
 bet 2lpfel apple ber ammer hammer ber attel saddle 
 
 ber 33oben ^/7 ber ^anbel quarrel ber djaben damage 
 
 ber 33ruber brother ber Saben j/0r<? ber djjnabel fo0 
 
 ber gaben thread ber SKangel w^^/ ber d^raager brother-in-law 
 
 ber arten garden ber SRantel ^?^ ber SSater father 
 
 ber raben /#&/* ber ^Jtagel // ber 3SogeI 
 
 328. The two masculines in tum with plural in Ct (74, 5). 
 ber Srrtum error ber Steid^tum wealth 
 
 329. Nine foreign masculines with plural in C* 
 
 ber 3lltar altar ber eneral general ber ^arbtnal cardinal 
 ber 33ifd^of to/^^/ ber $anal canal ber ^Ulorafi morass 
 ber (Sfyoral ^w ber Saplan chaplain ber ^alafi /a/^ 
 
 330. Two feminines with no additional ending in the plural. 
 bte -JRutter mother bie 5tod^ter daughter 
 
 331. Neuters with plural in er (52, 53). 
 
 ba efyalt salary bag erocmb garment 
 
 ba emad^ room (of a house) bag ofpital hospital 
 
 NOTE. Without vowel mutation : bag eftt)lett)t, race, sex ; bag 
 ghost ; bag SfJegiment, regiment ; and bag emitt (pi. emitter), w/'< 
 sition. 
 
 332. One neuter with no additional ending in the plural. 
 
 bag Softer monastery 
 
STRONG NOUNS WITHOUT VOWEL MUTATION io/ 
 2)er redjte Sefyrmeifter 
 
 g' alg ^unger nidjjt bem Secret, befjen aal ift immer t>oH, 
 SBeil im <5piel er aHe 6rf)iiler u Soltoren madden foH ; 
 SDer mit 9JUil)' bem 2)oltor lefyret, bafc er nut ein <5$uler ift, 
 SDefjen fleine ^Pforte jud^e, e^ u gro^ bu worben bifl 
 
 STRONG NOUNS WITHOUT VOWEL MUTATION 
 
 MONOSYLLABLES 
 333. Nonmutatable neuters with plural in er* 
 
 ba 33ilb picture 
 
 ba 33rett board 
 
 bag 6i ^* 
 
 bag $elb field 
 
 bag elb money 
 bag Ueb 
 
 bag $tnb child 
 
 bag 3Reig shoot 
 
 bag $leib dress 
 
 bag 9Rinb <?/" 
 
 bag trf)t light 
 bag 2ib eyelid 
 bag Sieb song 
 
 bag dfyroert sword 
 bag <5ttft institution 
 bag -JBeib woman 
 
 bag 9Zeft nest 
 
 
 334. Nonmutatable neuters with plural in 
 
 bag Seet - 
 
 { bf g arfen } 
 
 bag eer 
 bag cft 
 
 army 
 notebook 
 
 bag 6$iff 
 
 bag dfyroeii 
 
 ship 
 fthog 
 
 bag Scil 
 
 ax 
 
 bag Snie 
 
 knee 
 
 bag eil 
 
 rope 
 
 bag Sein 
 
 leg 
 
 bag Sreug 
 
 cross 
 
 bag ieb 
 
 sieve 
 
 bag Sier 
 
 beer 
 
 bag SJleer 
 
 sea 
 
 bag 6piel 
 
 play 
 
 bag edt 
 
 deck 
 
 bag 9te^ 
 
 net 
 
 bag ttidf 
 
 piece 
 
 bag @r 
 
 ore 
 
 bag fifyr 
 
 (eye of a 
 \ needle 
 
 bag Scil 
 bag ^ier 
 
 share 
 animal 
 
 bag gefl 
 
 hide 
 
 bag DI 
 
 oil 
 
 bag 2Ber! 
 
 work 
 
 bag geft 
 
 festival 
 
 bag $ferb 
 
 horse 
 
 bag 3^H 
 
 tent 
 
 bag ift 
 
 poison 
 
 bag SRe^ 
 
 doe 
 
 bag 3iel 
 
 goal 
 
 bag leig 
 
 track 
 
 bag Seid^ 
 
 empire 
 
 
 
io8 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 335. Mutatable neuters without vowel mutation with plural in 
 
 bag S3oot boat bag $al)r year bag ^funb pound 
 bag 33rot bread bag $od) yoke bag ^Sult desk 
 bag 33unb bundle bag Sog /#/ bag Quart quart 
 bag arn j0ra bag Sot plumb bag cfyaf sheep 
 bag rag #ra.$vr bag -JJlal #V* bag rfjrtmb ja/M 
 bag ramm #ra*8 bag 9JJug stewed fruit bag Sau heavy rope 
 bag aar //0*V bag ^$aar /0/r bag Sor ^a/* 
 
 336. Mutatable masculines without vowel mutation with plural 
 in e 
 
 ber 
 
 aai 
 
 eel 
 
 ber 
 
 ra J 
 
 t grain (a 
 
 ber 
 
 $unft 
 
 point 
 
 
 ber 
 
 aar 
 
 eagle 
 
 
 
 L weight) 
 
 ber 
 
 Qualm 
 
 vapor 
 
 
 ber 
 
 ait 
 
 act 
 
 ber 
 
 urt 
 
 girth 
 
 ber 
 
 Quarg 
 
 quartz 
 
 
 ber 
 
 arm 
 
 arm 
 
 ber 
 
 aft 
 
 clasp 
 
 ber 
 
 9tuf 
 
 call 
 
 
 ber 
 
 Sannj 
 
 proscrip- 
 tion 
 
 ber 
 ber 
 
 uf 
 
 hoof 
 
 ber 
 ber 
 
 d>alf 
 
 shaft 
 rogue 
 
 
 ber 
 
 SSorn 
 
 fount 
 
 ber 
 
 unb 
 
 dog 
 
 ber 
 
 d)uft 
 
 scamp 
 
 
 ber 
 
 Sorft 
 
 crack 
 
 ber 
 
 Ro^l 
 
 cabbage 
 
 ber 
 
 cfyul) 
 
 shoe 
 
 
 ber 
 
 <3udng 
 
 box tree 
 
 ber 
 
 Sulm 
 
 peak 
 
 ber 
 
 tar 
 
 starling 
 
 
 ber 
 
 ^Dacbg 
 
 badger 
 
 ber 
 
 Siirg 
 
 course 
 
 ber 
 
 toff 
 
 stuff 
 
 
 ber 
 
 Sod)t 
 
 wick 
 
 ber 
 
 Sa^g 
 
 salmon 
 
 ber 
 
 trold^ 
 
 vagabond 
 
 ber 
 
 old) 
 
 dagger 
 
 ber 
 
 2aut 
 
 sound 
 
 ber 
 
 unb 
 
 strait, sound 
 
 ber 
 
 om 
 
 cathedral 
 
 ber 
 
 Sud^g 
 
 lynx 
 
 ber 
 
 Sag 
 
 day 
 
 
 ber 
 
 3*k 
 
 groove 
 
 ber 9JZof)r 
 
 nightmare 
 
 ber 
 
 Salt -1 
 
 \time (in 
 
 
 ber 
 
 garn 
 
 fern 
 
 V^PV 
 
 ^T?nTrh- 
 
 (sold- 
 
 
 t music) 
 
 ber 
 
 gaun 
 
 faun 
 
 v\,\ 
 
 JLUUIUJ 
 
 \ mander 
 
 ber 
 
 Sfyron 
 
 throne 
 
 
 ber 
 
 gl(Kl)g 
 
 flax 
 
 ber 
 
 gjlunb 
 
 mouth 
 
 ber 
 
 Soaft 
 
 toast 
 
 
 ber 
 
 gunb 
 
 find 
 
 ber 
 
 $aft 
 
 agreement 
 
 ber 
 
 Sro^ 
 
 crowd 
 
 
 ber 
 
 olf 
 
 gulf 
 
 ber 
 
 $fab 
 
 path 
 
 ber 
 
 Suf*| 
 
 flourish 
 
 of 
 
 ber 
 
 rab 
 
 degree 
 
 ber 
 
 $ulg 
 
 pulse 
 
 
 \ trumpets 
 
 prid)tt)brter. ie 2iebe ift blinb. 
 
 2Bte ber SS.ogel, fo bag (Si. 
 
WEAK NOUNS 
 
 109 
 
 WEAK NOUNS 
 
 337. Masculine nouns denoting living beings which do not end 
 in C in the nominative singular. 
 
 ber 
 
 33dr 
 
 bear 
 
 ber 
 
 fierr 
 
 f gentle- 
 
 ber $fau 
 
 peacock 
 
 ber 
 
 33aper 
 
 Bavarian 
 
 
 C 
 
 \rnan 
 
 ber $ritt5 
 
 prince 
 
 berSr W e){-75 
 
 ' I fellow 
 
 ber 
 e. rt%> ( 
 
 irt 
 
 rtY)/ivf^ 
 
 shepherd 
 (human 
 
 ber dfjenf 
 
 ( cup- 
 -bearer 
 
 ber 
 
 G&rift 
 
 Christian 
 
 t>er 
 
 yJiettiu) 
 
 \ being 
 
 ber@d^ultl)e^ 
 
 R ma vor 
 
 ber 
 
 ginl 
 
 finch 
 
 ber 
 
 9Jio^r 
 
 Moor 
 
 ber tetnttiet 
 
 (stone- 
 
 ber 
 
 gran! 
 
 franc 
 
 ber 
 
 5Rarr 
 
 fool 
 
 
 - -cutter 
 
 ber 
 
 Siirft 
 
 prince 
 
 ber 
 
 Dberft 
 
 colonel 
 
 ber Zoic 
 
 fool 
 
 ber 
 
 raf 
 
 count 
 
 ber 
 
 Dcfyg 
 
 ox 
 
 ber SSorfafyr 
 
 ancestor 
 
 ber 
 
 reif 
 
 griffin 
 
 ber 
 
 s ^arb 
 
 panther 
 
 ber 3<u 
 
 Czar 
 
 ber 
 
 elb 
 
 hero 
 
 ber 
 
 ^Pfaff 
 
 priest 
 
 
 
 MIXED NOUNS 
 338. Some of the more common masculines. 
 
 ber Sauer peasant 
 ber 2)orn thorn 
 ber et)atter godfather 
 ber Sorbeer laurel 
 ber 3JJa[t w^^/ 
 ber 9Jlugfel muscle 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 ber SHeif 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 pain 
 
 ber 9iacpar neighbor ber 
 
 sparrow 
 
 339. Some of the more common neuters. 
 
 bag 2luge eye 
 bag S3ett ^<?^/ 
 bag (Snbe ^^/ 
 
 bag 
 
 bag ^letnob jewel 
 
 bag 3Kbbel furniture 
 
 ber taat 
 ber tacfyel 
 ber tra^l ^7 
 ber Setter cousin 
 ber Sing interest 
 
 bag Dfyr 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 THE NOUN 1 
 
 1. Declension of nouns. There are three noun declensions, the 
 strong, the weak, and the mixed. 
 
 2. Strong nouns, except feminines, take or e3 in the genitive 
 singular and usually e in the plural. Feminines take no endings in 
 the singular, but are inflected regularly in the plural. 
 
 3. Weak nouns, if masculine, take n or en in all cases singular 
 and plural, except in the nominative singular. Weak feminines take 
 n or en in the plural. 
 
 4. Mixed nouns add 3 or e in the genitive singular and n or en 
 in the plural. 
 
 5. The declension, vowel mutation, and gender of nouns can best 
 be learned by constant drill in giving their principal parts. These 
 are the nominative and genitive singular and the nominative plural. 
 In learning these forms the definite article must always accompany 
 the noun. Examples: 
 
 NOM. bet Stag GEN. beg ageg NOM. PL. bie age 
 bag aug beg aufeg bie aufer 
 
 6. The last member of a compound noun determines its gender 
 and declension, as bag aug, bet 6cfylufjel, ber ^augfdjlufjeL 
 
 7. Feminine nouns do not change their form in the singular. 
 
 8. All nouns end in n in the dative plural. 
 
 1 The treatment of nouns as given in the Appendix was suggested by 
 Professor George O. Curme of Northwestern University. It is a departure 
 from the customary way in which the noun in German has been treated, 
 but its simplicity and compactness will, no doubt, appeal to many teachers. 
 
 in 
 
112 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 9. The inflectional ending e is never used after el, en, er, d^en, 
 and iein. 
 
 10. The strong declension. To the strong declension belong the 
 great body of German masculine and neuter nouns, a few fem- 
 inines, and the great majority of foreign words accented on the last 
 syllable if they represent lifeless things. 
 
 . 11. This declension takes g or eg in the genitive singular and 
 usually e in the plural forms, sometimes with, but more commonly 
 without, vowel mutation. 
 
 12. The ending eg of the genitive singular is usually confined to 
 monosyllables ; and even there it is used only when g is difficult to 
 pronounce, or to avoid a clash of accents when an accented syllable 
 follows in the next word, as beg $uf;eg, be% Stfdjeg, beg aufeg, beg 
 SDorfeg or SDorfg ; but beg 9Jtanneg SJhit, not beg SKanng 3Kut. 
 
 13. Usage varies in regard to adding e in the dative singular. 
 It is in general confined to monosyllables, and is often omitted even 
 there, as bem Sage or Sag; bem aufe or aug; bem ^bnige or 
 $bnig; but always bem Sefyrer, bem Sogel, bem paten. 
 
 14. The strong declension. Examples: ber Sag, day, bag $afyr, 
 year-, ber 9JJonat, month-, bag Monument, monument. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber Sag bag $afyr ber 3Konat bag Monument 
 
 beg Sageg beg ^afyreg beg SJlonatg beg SJIonumentg 
 
 bem Sage bem ^afyw bem 9Konat bem SRonument 
 
 ben Sag bag $af)r ben -Jftonat bag Monument 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie Sage bie 3 a ^^ bit donate bie SJtonumente 
 
 ber Sage ber 3al)re ber DJJonate ber 3Utonumente 
 
 ben Sagen ben S^m* ben SJlonaten ben SRonumenten 
 
 bie Sage bie 3>al)re bie SRonate bie -Jftonumente 
 
 prid^tDort. @g fytlft nid)tg, fid) iiber gefd^e^ene SDtnge gu argern. 
 
APPENDIX 113 
 
 15. Exceptions to the strong declension. The following classes 
 of strong nouns form their plural irregularly. The first class omits 
 the plural ending e, and the second takes er instead of e in the plural. 
 
 16. Class I. To this class belong all masculine and neuter nouns 
 in e, el, en, er, cf)en, and lein. Nouns in rf)en and lein are neuter and 
 usually have the stem vowel mutated. 
 
 17. Examples of class I : bet paten, spade; ber Secret, teacher 
 ba3 ebaube, building bag $raulein, young lady, Miss. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber paten ber Sefyrer bag ebaube bag graulein 
 
 beg Spateng beg Sefyrerg beg ebaubeg beg grauleing 
 
 bem paten bem Sefyrer bem ebaube bem graulein 
 
 ben paten ben Sefyrer bag ebaube bag graulein 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bte paten bie Sefyrer bie ebaube bie ^rauletn 
 
 ber paten ber Sefyrer ber ebaube ber gtauletn 
 
 ben paten ben Severn ben ebduben ben graulein 
 
 bie paten bie Sefyrer bte ebaube bie $rauletn 
 
 18. The following nouns of class I often omit n in the nomina- 
 tive singular : ber grtebe, ber gunle, ber ebanfe, ber laube, ber 
 aufe, ber 9lame, ber ante, ber dfjabe, and ber 2Bttte. 3)er $elfen 
 often drops en in the nominative and accusative singular. 
 
 19. Class II. To this class belong the following groups : 
 
 1. Eight masculine monosyllables, as ber eift (323). 
 
 2. About 50 neuter monosyllables, as bag $inb (325, 333). 
 
 3. Eight neuter polysyllables, as bag efd)led)t (331). 
 
 4. All nouns ending in turn, as bag SUtertum (74, 5). 
 
 pridjroorter. eute rot morgen tot. 
 
 Sg i[t nicfytg jo fetn gefponnen, 
 
 @g fomtnt bod^ enblid) an bie onnen. 
 
114 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 20. Examples of class II: ber eift, spirit-, bag $inb, child \ 
 bag efd)lerf)t, race, sex. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 bet eift bag $inb bag efdjlecf)t 
 
 beg eifteg beg $inbeg beg efrf)led)tg 
 
 bem eifte betn $inbe bem efd)led()t 
 
 ben eift bag $inb bag efcf)led)t 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie eifter bie Sinber bie efdfjledfjter 
 
 ber eifter ber ^tnber ber efdjlerfjter 
 
 ben eiftern ben $inbern ben efd)led)tern 
 
 bie eifter bie $inber bie efdf)le$ter 
 
 21. 2)er eift and ber Seib are the only nonmutatable masculine 
 monosyllables which take er in the plural. 
 
 22. ag efd)Ied^t, bag efpenft, and bag 9te<riment are the only 
 nonmutatable neuter polysyllables which take er in the plural. ag 
 emilt, which has the vowel mutated both in the singular and the 
 plural, also belongs in this,, class. 
 
 23. Vowel mutation in strong nouns. The majority of strong 
 nouns do not have vowel mutation. The group which mutates, 
 however, is composed of many monosyllables and a small number 
 of polysyllables of frequent occurrence. 
 
 24. Monosyllables with vowel mutation. This group contains : 
 
 1. About 200 masculines. Six of these take er in the plural 
 and the rest take e (322, 323). 
 
 2. 33 feminines (324). 
 
 3. About 35 neuters; 
 
 (a) 33 with plural in er (325). 
 
 (b\ Two with plural in e : bag glofc, //. bie glofte ; bag Sfyor, 
 //. bie @f)ore or (Sfyore (326). 
 
 pridjroort. SBer bie Seiter fyinauf roill, ntujs bei ber unterften 
 (Sproffe anfangen. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 25. Examples of monosyllables with vowel mutation : ber 
 
 tree; bte tabt, city; bag Slid), book; bet 2lrt, physician ; bet 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 
 ber 33aum 
 
 bte tabt 
 
 bag Surf) 
 
 ber 2lrt 
 
 ber ^Iu^ 
 
 beg Saumeg 
 
 ber tabt 
 
 beg 33urfjeg 
 
 beg airgleg 
 
 beg ^lufjeg 
 
 bem Saume 
 
 ber tab! 
 
 bem Surfje 
 
 bem 3lr5te 
 
 bem glufic 
 
 ben Saum 
 
 bte tabt 
 
 bag 33ud^ 
 
 ben 2lrgt 
 
 ben glu^ 
 
 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 
 
 bte 33aume 
 
 bte table 
 
 bte Siirfjer 
 
 bte Sir^te 
 
 bte gliiffe 
 
 ber Saume 
 
 ber table 
 
 ber 33itd(jer 
 
 ber 3trte 
 
 ber gluffe 
 
 ben Saumen 
 
 ben labten 
 
 ben Sud^ern 
 
 ben Srglen 
 
 ben glitfjen 
 
 bie Saume 
 
 bte table 
 
 bte S3itrf)er 
 
 bte Srjtc 
 
 bte glilffc 
 
 26. The group of nonmutating monosyllables is very large, and 
 includes about 265 masculines and all neuters except about 35. For 
 a list of the more common nonmutating monosyllables see 333-336. 
 
 27. Polysyllables with vowel mutation. Only a very small num- 
 ber of polysyllabic strong nouns have vowel mutation. To this 
 group belong : 
 
 i . The following masculines : 
 
 (a) 2 1 in el, en, er (327). 
 
 (b) Two in turn : ber SHetdfjtum and ber 3frrtum ( 74 > 5)- 
 (V) Nine foreign nouns, as ber Slltar (329). 
 
 2. The following feminines : 
 
 (a) te gjJutier, bte 2ocf)ter, bte 2lrmbruft, and bte efd)nwlft. 
 () Compounds in funft and flud)t. 
 
 3. The following neuters : 
 (a) ag filofter. 
 
 (fr) All neuters in turn. 
 
 (c) 2)a3 emac^, bag e^alt, bag eroanb, and bag ofptta(, which 
 take er in the plural. 
 
 28. All mutatable nouns which take er in the plural mutate the 
 vowel (a, o, u) in the plural. 
 
n6 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 29. Nouns in turn mutate the vowel of this suffix and take er in 
 the plural. For the gender of nouns in turn see 74, 5. 
 
 30. Examples of polysyllables with vowel mutation : bet Slpfel, 
 apple \ ber arten, garden ; bie 9Jtutter, mother-, bag 2lltertum, an- 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 ber 2lpfel 
 
 ber arten 
 
 bie Gutter 
 
 bag 2lltertum 
 
 beg 2lpfelg 
 
 beg arteng 
 
 ber Gutter 
 
 beg 2lltertumg 
 
 bem 2lpfel 
 
 bem arten 
 
 ber Gutter 
 
 bem 2lltertum 
 
 ben 2lpfel 
 
 ben arten 
 
 bie Gutter 
 
 bag 2Utertum 
 
 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 
 bie Spfel 
 
 bie arten 
 
 bie Gutter 
 
 bie 3lltertiimer 
 
 ber tpfel 
 
 ber arten 
 
 ber flitter 
 
 ber 2lltertiimer 
 
 ben 2(pfeln 
 
 ben arten 
 
 ben 5UZuttern 
 
 ben 2lltertumern 
 
 bie tpfel 
 
 bie arten 
 
 bie Gutter 
 
 bie 2tltertiimer 
 
 31. The weak declension. Nouns of the weak declension end 
 in n or en except in the nominative singular masculine. Feminine 
 nouns are not inflected in the singular. There are no neuters. 
 
 32. Weak nouns do not have vowel mutation. 
 
 33. Examples of the weak declension : ber Snabe, boy, bie $rau, 
 lady; ber tubent, student-, bie Sefyrerin, lady teacher; ber err, 
 
 gentleman, Mr. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 ber tubent bie Sefyrerin ber err 
 
 beg Stubenten ber Sefyrerin beg errn 
 
 bemStubenten ber 2efyrerin bem errn 
 
 ben Stubenten bie 2efyrerin ben errn 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie ^naben bie gtauen bie Stubenten bie Se^rerinnen bie erren 
 
 ber ^naben ber grauen ber tubenten ber Se^rerinnen ber erren 
 
 ben ^naben ben $rauen ben Stubenten ben Se^rerinnen ben erren 
 
 bie Snaben bie grauen bie Stubenten bie Se^rerinnen bie erren 
 
 NOTE. The noun <Qerr omits the inflectional e in the singular. 
 
 ber Snabe bie $rau 
 beg ^naben ber $rau 
 bem^naben ber^rau 
 ben ^naben bie $rau 
 
APPENDIX II/ 
 
 34. Feminines formed from masculines by adding in double the 
 n before adding the plural ending en. 
 
 35. Membership. 
 
 1 . All feminine nouns except the following, which are strong : 
 
 (a) The mutating feminines 5Rutter and 2orf)ter. 
 
 (b) About 33 mutating monosyllables (324). 
 (V) Those ending in nig and fal. 
 
 (d) Mutating compounds in lunft and flud)t. 
 
 2. Masculines in e representing living beings, as ber Snabe, bet 
 Sbroe, bet 2lffe ; and two representing things : bet 33ud)ftabe and 
 ber gefynte. 
 
 3. Foreign words : 
 
 (a) Masculines accented on the last syllable and representing 
 living beings, as ber Segat. Exceptions : nouns ending in accented 
 al, an, tin, ar, at, eitr, ier, or, belong to the strong declension whether 
 they represent living beings or lifeless things, as ber eneral, ber 
 $umpan, ber ouueran, ber ^ommentar, ber efretar, ber Gfyaffeur, 
 ber Officer, ber -JRajor. 
 
 (li) Masculines in accented anb, enb, ant, ent, and grapfy, repre- 
 senting persons or things, and also ber Cornet and ber planet. 
 Examples : ber SJtuliipIifanb, ber SJlinuenb, ber gabrifant, ber <5tu= 
 bent, ber ^aragrapfy. 
 
 36. The mixed declension. The mixed declension uses strong 
 endings in the singular and weak in the plural. The genitive sin- 
 gular adds g or eg and the plural n or en. Nouns taken from 
 French, English, and other modern languages add g in the plural. 
 
 37. Examples of the mixed declension : bag 2Iuge, eye; ber 5Dof- 
 lor, doctor; bag tubium, study; ba %Q\\\\, fossil*. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 bag 2luge ber Softor bag 6tubium bag $offtl bag erj 
 
 beg 2lugeg beg Sottorg beg 6tubiumg beg gofftlg beg er$eng 
 
 bem 2luge bem SDoftor bem tubium bem ^\\\\ bem 
 
 bag 3lugc ben SDoftor bag tubium bag goffil bag 
 
Il8 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 bie Slugen bie Softoren bie tubien bie $ojfilien bie Bergen 
 
 ber 2lugen bet SDoftoren bet 6tubien ber gofftlien bet 
 
 ben 2lugen ben SDoItoren ben tubien ben goffilien ben 
 
 bie 2lugen bte SDoftoren bie tubien bie $offilien bie eren 
 
 NOTE. The noun Jperj is irregular in declension. 
 
 38. Membership. 
 
 A. Native German words : 
 
 1. About 50 masculines, a few of which are monosyllabic (338). 
 
 2. About 15 neuters, mostly monosyllabic (339). 
 
 B. Many foreign words : 
 
 i. Masculine nouns in on, or, ug, and tug from Latin and Greek. 
 
 NOTE i. Both on and or are short and unaccented in the singular but 
 long and accented in the plural, as ber 2)ottor, pi. bie 2)o!toren ; ber 2)timon, 
 pi. bie 2)timonen. Words in accented on, or, belong to the strong declen- 
 sion, as ber Sftajor, pi. bie 3ftajore ; ber )ia!on, pi. bie 2)ia!one. 
 
 NOTE 2. Foreign masculines in u and iu usually remain unchanged in 
 the singular, as ber hunting, beg -ftuntiuS, pi. bie -ftuntien. Those in u3 are 
 inclined to become strong, as ber $rotilg, beg $roflt3, bie 
 
 2. Neuter nouns from Latin and Greek : 
 (a) Those ending in a, as bag SDrama. 
 
 (fr) Those ending in eum, ium, uum, on (unaccented), which be- 
 come in the plural een, ten, uen, en, as bag -JJtufeum, pi. bie 3Jhtfeen ; 
 bag tubium, pi. bie tubien ; bag 3)iftirf)on, pi. bie SDiftidjen. 
 
 (c) Those ending in il, al, with plural in ten. These nouns, how- 
 ever, are inclined to become strong, as bag $offil, pi. bie $0ffile or 
 $ojftlien; bag Mineral, pi. bie 3Kinerale or SKineralien. 
 
 (d) ag gnfctt and bag ^ntereffe. 
 
 3. Masculine and neuter nouns and a few feminines from French, 
 English, and other modern languages. These words add g in the 
 plural. Examples : bag 3Re[taurant, beg Seftaurantg, bie SHeftaurantg ; 
 ber Sorb, beg Sorbg, bie Sorbg ; bie Sabt), ber Sabp, bie Sabpg or 
 Sabieg ; bie SSitta, ber SSiHa, bte SSiUag or SStHen ; ber 5Don, beS 
 S>ong, bie ong ; ber $afdf)a, beg ^Jafc^ag, bie $afdjag. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 
 
 i. Poverty is no disgrace. 2. Work strengthens the body. 
 3. February is the shortest month. 4. The peasants have horses 
 and cows. 5. We (9Kan, 161) see soldiers everywhere in Germany. 
 6. Do you drink tea or coffee ? 7. I prefer pears to apples. 
 8. Wolves are enemies of sheep. 9. Switzerland is a republic. 
 10. In autumn the leaves fall from the trees, n. Where is little 
 Anna? 12. In (SBeim) writing we use our arm and our fingers. 
 13. Winter brings snow and ice. 14. Birds have beaks. 15. Meat 
 is dearer than bread. 16. When pride rises fortune sinks. 17. It 
 was in the month (of) June. 18. We go to church on Sunday. 
 19. Love hopeth all things. 20. Death knocks at the door of huts 
 and palaces. 21. Dogs like to eat meat. 22. Water is colorless. 
 23. Sorrow (//.) has killed him. 24. I haven't seen him since 
 Monday. 25. Hawks are birds. 26. Our hotel is in Ring Street. 
 27. The mother had her child in her arms. 28. The student has 
 a book in his hand. 29. The students were singing songs. 
 30. Since the year 1871 the kings of Prussia have also been the 
 emperors of Germany. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE, THE POSSESSIVE 
 ADJECTIVES, AND letn 
 
 i. My friend is very successful as a lawyer. 2. A king lives in 
 a castle. 3. He is expecting his father at the station. 4. The 
 yard before our house is very small. 5. My son is a tailor. 6. Her 
 nephew lives in a village in the Black Forest. 7. The spade belongs 
 to our gardener. 8. Birds are distinguished from other animals 
 
 119 
 
120 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 by (burdf)) their feathers. 9. Your letter was lying on my table. 
 10. His brother wishes to become a physician, n. Have your 
 friends gone to (auf) the country? 12. Their teacher likes music. 
 13. We do not like him as a neighbor. 14. His father will be 
 ninety years old in January. 15. They have our table and your 
 chair. 16. The eye is a mirror. 17. Edward, write your letter 
 now. 1 8. I can't understand a word of French. 19. The man 
 has a book and a cane ; he is a professor. 20. We always write 
 our exercises with pen and ink. 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS 
 
 i. The basket is in the garden. 2. She has her pen and your 
 book. 3. The apples of this tree will soon be ripe. 4. My teeth 
 are good, but my eyes have always been weak. 5. The maid is 
 making the beds. 6. Our neighbors have two horses and a cow. 
 7^ His head is large, but his feet are small. 8. The farmers of 
 (in) this state are rich. 9. My cousin has two sons, but they do 
 not live in this city. 10. The faith of the heart is strong, n. A 
 year has twelve months, a month four weeks, a week seven days, 
 and a day twenty-four hours. 12. The churches in this city are 
 beautiful. 13. She took your comb and my brush. 14. In the 
 box we found plates, cups, knives, forks, and glasses. 15. I laid 
 the key on the table beside the watch. 16. This forest belongs to 
 the king. 17. Joseph had written a letter to (an) his uncle. 
 18. There (@3) are seven boys and ten girls in this class. 19. The 
 teacher did not know the names of all his pupils. 20. The count 
 and the countess rewarded the shepherd. 21. The sons of kings 
 are princes. 22. We can see five villages in the valley below. 
 23. The rooms of this cloister are very small and gloomy. 24. Mother 
 put my shoes under the bed. 25. The king's castle stood among 
 the trees near the lake. 26. Have you seen this picture of my 
 nephew ? 27. His coat is hanging behind the door. 28. The lion 
 is the king of beasts. 29. In olden times (antiquity) people 
 
EXERCISES 121 
 
 believed in (an) many gods. 30. In the banks there are generally 
 neither chairs nor benches. 31. The cook (fern.) is cooking soup 
 and vegetables on the stove. 32. This afternoon she will bake 
 bread and cake. 33. The fish are lying in the bucket behind the 
 stove. 34. You will find the tub, the broom, and the brush in the 
 kitchen. 35. The old woman with the gray horse sells peas, beans, 
 turnips, and potatoes. 36. My daughter brought me a glass of 
 water. 37. Here is a bottle of vinegar. Do you also want a 
 pound of butter? 38. This ticket costs six marks. 39. At ($u) 
 Easter we have a week's vacation. 40. These ashes are still 
 warm. 41. Our horse is fourteen hands high and weighs eleven 
 hundred pounds. 42. Father drank two cups of hot coffee for 
 (um) breakfast. 43. My parents were both born in Germany. 
 44. In this region the peasants raise oats. 
 
 PROPER NOUNS 
 
 i . The people called Emperor Frederick, the father of Emperor 
 William II, ,,Unfern $ri". 2 Frieda's mother's name was Mar- 
 garet. 3. The houses of (t)0n) Paris are very beautiful. 4. Fred's 
 parents have moved to New York. 5. Professor Meyer's oldest 
 daughter will be married next month. 6. I am committing some 
 of Schiller's and Heine's poems to memory. 7. We did not see 
 Herman and Agnes. 8. Mother gave Marie a new dress and Max 
 a pair of skates. 9. This flower is for little Bertha. 10. Have 
 you ever read Voss's ,,uije" ? n. The universities of Germany 
 are very famous. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE 
 
 i. Good children obey their parents. 2. Old friends are like 
 (rate) old wine; their worth increases with their age. 3. The 
 young man with a basket in his right hand brings us a dozen 
 fresh eggs every week. 4. Her little brothers are very obedient 
 and lovable boys. 5. The pretty girl on the brown horse was the 
 
122 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 sister of my friend Christopher. 6. My son wrote me a long letter 
 yesterday. 7. The fresh green of the leaves is changing into a 
 reddish brown. 8. Many poor people live in small, dark rooms. 
 9. One day a little yellow bird came to (urn) drink out of the large 
 bucket which hung over the deep well. 10. My daughter has a 
 large head, a well-formed nose, and large blue eyes. n. We 
 never had such a good president. 12. The noble knight was a 
 very good and brave man, always ready to help the poor and the 
 weak. 13. Our German teacher has a new house and a beautiful 
 flower-garden. 14. I read several good books this summer. 15. My 
 little brother will be eight years old next month. 16. Our faithful 
 old servant died last night. 17. A sleeping fox catches no chickens. 
 18. Children who-have-been-burned fear the fire. 19. No one 
 greeted the stranger. 20. This coming week we intend to depart. 
 21. The gain which-is-to-be-hoped-for will not be large. 22. All 
 the bread in this box was baked yesterday. 23. The lesson to be- 
 learned is too long. 24. All my relatives live in Germany. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES 
 
 i . Our neighbors have all kinds of flowers. 2 . We picked a 
 few red roses. 3. There was only a little oil in the bottle. 4. All 
 Germany helped the count. 5. We have enough butter but not 
 enough potatoes. 6. These presents cost little money but much 
 work. 7. That happened several years later. 8. You have n't any 
 meat. Oh yes, I have some. 9. The English duke remained only 
 a few days in Berlin. 10. That is sheer nonsense, n. He has 
 bought Goethe's entire works. 12. This young man has too much 
 money and too many friends. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES 
 
 i. This picture belongs in that room. 2. What kind of watch 
 have you ? 3. Have we the same lesson to-day that we had yester- 
 day ? 4. It was that man whose house burned down. 5. To 
 
EXERCISES 123 
 
 which child do you wish to give this doll ? 6. Such a man is wel- 
 come everywhere. 7. In what kind of factory are you working ? 
 
 8. I do not know which sentence you mean. 9. Which horse do 
 you wish to sell, this one or that one ? 10. For what kind of 
 room do you want this carpet ? 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 
 
 i . Did you ever see a larger apple ? 2 . Have you still younger 
 sons ? 3. John is the biggest of the boys. 4. A diamond is harder 
 than the hardest metal. 5. I have never read a more interesting 
 book. 6. Paul has always been one of my most faithful friends. 
 7. That was an exceedingly agreeable surprise. 8. Here the ice 
 is strongest. 9. My grandmother is the oldest woman in this 
 village. 10. These cherries are riper than those, n. My uncle 
 is older than my father. 12. This plum is the largest. 13. This 
 pupil is less talented than industrious. 14. The tree is higher than 
 our house. 15. The coldest water is in the deepest well. 16. Marie 
 is just as clever as her sister. 17. Anna has a large apple, Eliza- 
 beth a larger one, but George has the largest. 18. Carl is most 
 diligent when he goes to school. 19. This is the shortest day of 
 the year. 20. That is very disagreeable to me. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 
 
 i . John ran the fastest. 2 . (The) Jupiter is comparatively near 
 the earth, (the) Mars is still nearer, and the moon is the nearest. 
 3. We were in Leipzig longer than in Dresden, but we remained 
 longest in Berlin. 4. The older my father gets, the less he reads. 
 5. It will be twelve o'clock at least before I shall have finished these 
 sentences. 6. Bertha told her story the best. 7. That occurs very 
 rarely. 8. The airship is traveling (fasten) faster than the train. 
 
 9. The fire in this stove burns better when the wind is in (comes 
 from) the north. 
 
124 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 NUMERALS 
 
 i. I have three brothers; the first is twenty-five years old, the 
 second twenty-two, and the third is in his fifteenth year. 2. Give 
 me half of your apple. 3. He has been here three times. 4. There 
 are all kinds of people in the world. 5. To-day is the twenty-second 
 of February. 6. Here are two kinds of pears. 7. Write the first 
 sentence and the sixth. 8. Three is a fifth of fifteen. 9. We have 
 read the first twenty pages. 10. A fourfold cord will hold all the 
 (befto) better. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS 
 
 i . I thank you very much for the stamps which you sent me for 
 my collection. 2. He will help me. 3. You learn quickly, but you 
 also forget quickly. 4. Here is a brush; lay it on the table. 
 
 5. That girl is very industrious. Do you know what her name is ? 
 
 6. Henry, stop beating your dog. 7. The birds are singing in the 
 trees. 8. This hat is too small for me ; I can't wear it. 9. What 
 do we do with our eyes ? We see with them. 10. I sat behind you 
 in church last Sunday, n. Mother said to me, " Helen, what are 
 you doing?" 12. Here is a gold watch; what will you give me 
 for it ? 13. Did you ever read this story ? 14. Give us this day 
 our daily bread. 15. Child, you must not take off your mittens. 
 16. I saw you, but I know you didn't see me. 17. She will not 
 disturb you, father. 18. Mr. Schmidt, have you seen our new 
 house ? 19. My sister's children never obey her, although she 
 punishes them quite often. 20. We hope to see you and your 
 husband in Prague next year. 
 
 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 i. He is rejoicing at his success. 2. She is washing her hands. 
 3. Are you afraid to stay here alone ? 4. They always flatter each 
 other. 5. My parents will be surprised at my progress. 6. Fred 
 looked around at me. 7. They had lost their way in the forest. 
 
EXERCISES 125 
 
 8. I sat down in order to rest myself. 9. We both hurt ourselves 
 on that nail. 10. The poor child is not feeling well to-day, n. You 
 contradict yourself in everything that you say. 12. He imagines 
 that he is especially talented. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 i. The fault is ours. 2. Whose book is this? It is mine. 
 
 3. He was thinking of my brother and yours. 4. I have lost all 
 my possessions. 5. Is this your umbrella ? No, it is his ; that one 
 is mine. 6. Do not forget to distinguish between what-is-mine and 
 what-is-yours. 7. Our table is larger than theirs. 8. Their piano 
 cost more than ours. 9. I have not seen my people for five years. 
 10. This room is hers ; but, as you see, it is not as pretty as yours. 
 n. I have his pen and he has mine. 12. My father was a physi- 
 cian and hers was a merchant. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 i. Who loaned me this lead pencil ? 2. What have you in your 
 hand ? 3. He showed me two umbrellas and asked me which one 
 I wanted. 4. For whom are you making this beautiful present ? 
 5. What were you laughing about? 6. Whose picture is that? 
 7. What were you standing on ? 8. Whom do you mean ? Which 
 one did he mean ? 9. Fred has a gold watch. What kind of one 
 have you ? 10. What did the child hurt itself with ? n. I do not 
 know whose dog bit my little niece. 12. What did his mother say? 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 i. There were many people there whom I did n't know. 2. Have 
 you a key with which I can open this door ? 3. The donkey which 
 had been carrying the sacks to the mill became old and lame. 
 
 4. Whatever is beautiful is not always good. 5. This is the moun- 
 tain at the top of which is a hotel. 6. The man whom we met is 
 
126 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 my English teacher. 7. The lady whose watch I found yesterday 
 on the stairway is one of my students. 8. He does not understand 
 all the teacher says. 9. This is the plant of which I was speaking. 
 10. Do you know the famous doctor whose daughter is going to 
 marry the count ? n. I have found the knife which you had lost. 
 12. Whoever says that doesn't know anything about (t)0tt) music. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 i. These pears are larger than those. 2. Is that enough bread 
 for you ? 3. Those who help us in misfortune are our true friends. 
 4. This is my brother and those are my sisters. 5. This is her 
 watch ; it was lying on that book. 6. I do not believe that. 7. He 
 has my book and also my sister's. 8. Those are plums, but these 
 are cherries. 9. What do you think of that? 10. Herman gave 
 Walter and his brother a new sled. n. He says that that is 
 impossible. 12. I know there are such. 13. The elephant and 
 the whale are the largest animals ; the former lives on land, the 
 latter in the water. 14. He is one of those whom you (man) can- 
 not trust. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 
 
 I. Offend no one, but help every one. 2. Somebody has stolen 
 my overcoat. 3. He knows something about it. 4. Some people 
 have much money and spend very little. 5. No one knew how the 
 fire had started. 6. Many were invited, but only a few came. 
 7. Both of your children are very talented. 8. Everybody's 
 business is nobody's business. 9. Many of the best students are 
 poor. 10. I do not know any of your friends in Berlin. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS 
 
 i. The glasses are standing on the table. 2. We are going 
 without him. 3. According to my opinion he should not have 
 done it. 4. The earth revolves about the sun with great rapidity. 
 
EXERCISES 127 
 
 5. He could not come on account of the illness of his mother. 6. I 
 shall go to church with my father. 7. The painting (picture) 
 hangs above the altar. 8. She laid the cloak on the bed. 9. Her 
 hat was lying on the chair beside the bed. 10. We sat around the 
 fire on the beach and told stories, n. My parents will not return 
 from their trip to Germany before next week. 12. When both 
 objects are nouns the dative stands before the accusative. 13. The 
 book had been lying under the bench. 14. We generally get up 
 at six o'clock. 15. He came to my house this morning. 16. She 
 sat opposite me at the table. 17. We were swimming against the 
 stream. 18. When are you going home ? 19. We have been 
 good friends for many years. 20. I saw him a week ago when he 
 was at home. 21. The enemy's camp is above the city. 22. The 
 roofs of the houses were covered with snow. 23. The parson 
 laughed at (iibet) the peasant's stupidity. 24. Both armies fought 
 bravely until sundown. 25. Carl came instead of his brother. 
 26. The students wrote the sentences on the board, and the teacher 
 corrected them. 27. He made the trip at (auf) my expense. 
 28. The sun stood high above the village. 29. The general praised 
 the colonel on account of his bravery. 30. Last year I lived at 
 (bet) my grandmother's. 31. A month ago to-day we were in Paris. 
 
 32. No one came to see us on New Year's day except my aunt. 
 
 33. It has n't rained here for a month. 34. She had to stay in the 
 house last week on account of the cold. 35. Do you know the 
 difference between strong and weak verbs ? 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 i . The children ran into the house and asked their mother for 
 some bread. 2. We are going home, for it will soon be dark. 
 3. Here is a bird's nest, but there are no eggs in it. 4. He is 
 very poor, otherwise he would dress better. 5. I don't drink wine, 
 but I like to eat grapes. 6. Either you must make up your mind 
 now or I must set out alone. 7. Man is often abandoned by his 
 
128 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 best friends, yet God never abandons us. 8. She is small but 
 pretty. 9. Nature has peculiar beauties both in autumn and in 
 spring. 10. Our servant is not only very diligent but he is also 
 very faithful and honest, n. Even that did not satisfy him. 
 12. He is poor because he is lazy. 13. If I were in your place, I 
 would do it. 14. He asked me whether I knew him. 15. It was 
 not his sister but his niece who sang before the emperor. 16. Every 
 mother knows that a good book is an acceptable present for a 
 diligent boy. 17. I shall come as often as I can. 18. He does 
 not know where his teacher lives. 19. We shall remain here until 
 they return. 20. If you see him, ask him when the concert begins. 
 21. We shall depart as soon as the train arrives. 22. When the 
 wind is in the north it is always too cold in this room. 23. The 
 child slept while I was writing a letter. 24. I have no time, other- 
 wise I would help you. 25. Carl will receive his inheritance when 
 he is (will be) twenty-one years old. 26. We don't know when they 
 will come. 27. The struggle was hard, but the victory was glorious. 
 
 VERBS 
 
 i . Do you always speak German at home ? 2 . The teamster is 
 beating the horse. 3. My mother often combs and braids my hair. 
 4. The fire had gone out. It will have gone out. 5. Frederick 
 the Great offered the miller a large sum for his mill, but he 
 didn't wish to sell it. 6. The workman fell from the roof of 
 the church-tower. 7. Both armies fought bravely until sundown. 
 8. The snow is melting on the roofs. 9. In the fall the swallows 
 fly to the south. 10. We wanted to put the matter off. n. The 
 mother has rocked her child to (in) sleep. 12. The child has gone 
 to sleep. The child is sleeping. 13. The thief hid in the forest. 
 He had hidden the money in a dry tree. 14. Mr. Black died from 
 (cm) the effects of the operation. 15. It is getting late, we must 
 hasten. 16. The king's carriage was drawn by six white horses. 
 17. Bad company corrupts good morals. 18. This dog does not 
 
EXERCISES 129 
 
 chase the sheep. He follows me wherever I go. 19. Eat, drink, 
 and be merry. 20. The old man sat down in his armchair. 
 21. Shakespeare's dramas have been translated into many lan- 
 guages. 22. They will move into their new house next month. 
 23. He rode at full speed through the village. 24. Diligence 
 overcomes many difficulties. 25. When I get up in the morning 
 I drink a glass of cold water. 26. The storm frightened the 
 people. The people are frightened. 27. My friend induced me 
 to go hunting with him. 28. A mother prays for her children. 
 29. It has been raining for several hours. 30. Mother, are you bak- 
 ing bread ? This cake was not baked enough. 31. Whoever does 
 not know (fbnnen) a foreign language knows nothing of his own. 
 32. This river flows through a beautiful valley. 33. In the begin- 
 ning God created heaven and earth. 34. Do you like (eat gladly) 
 fried potatoes ? 35. I do not think that the teacher will come to- 
 day. 36. During the summer four new houses were built on (in) 
 this street. 37. The coat was not hanging in the closet. 38. I 
 often have to loan my brother some money. 39. We expect to 
 remain here until the first of June. 40. Henry did not act accord- 
 ing to the advice of his friends. 41. The rain has laid the dust. 
 42. Are you the lady who lost her watch? 43. They blasted all 
 the rocks in the harbor. 44. The enemy has fled and the victory 
 is ours. 45. We got up early in order to see the sun rise. 46. The 
 coachman was watering his horses. 47. Carl fell on the ice and 
 broke (re/I.) his arm. 48. I must stay at home to-day and help 
 my mother. 49. He had grown much older since I last saw him. 
 50. Are you acquainted with the president of the bank ? 51. The 
 clerk is measuring the cloth. 52. The poor widow and her little 
 children seemed to v have suffered very much during the winter. 
 53. Not more than a quarter of an hour before the storm not a 
 leaf was stirring. 54. My aunt, who lives in Denver, has invited 
 me to visit her next summer during my vacation. 55. Last week 
 we had to water the plants every day on account of the heat. 
 56. More railroad accidents occur in America than in Europe. 
 
130 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 57. If the patient can partake of (enjoy) food he will surely re- 
 cover soon. 58. My wife is taking a drive in the park this after- 
 noon. 59. Cats catch rats and mice. Our cat doesn't catch birds. 
 60. That arrangement does not suit me at all. 61. I hope that 
 you will succeed. He will never succeed. 62. How many pounds 
 can you lift? He lifted the child out of the carriage. 63. That 
 region will be laid waste by the enemy. 64. This plant flourishes 
 only in the south. 65. Many people are called Smith. 66. My 
 cousin was bitten by his little black dog. 67. The child will soon 
 be bathed by its aunt. 68. A good workman is usually well paid. 
 69. The doors opened at seven o'clock. 70. These apple trees 
 were planted two years ago. 71. Not many soldiers were killed, 
 but a large number were wounded. 72. The English were de- 
 feated by the French. 73. I have been told that your son wishes 
 to become a physician. 74. Those apples are ripe and must be 
 picked. 75. Harry is throwing the ball against the house. 76. The 
 little boy was very much ashamed because he was blamed by his 
 mother. 77. A friend brought that picture along for me from Eng- 
 land. 78. By that time the debt will have been paid. 79. This bell 
 is rung only when fire breaks out. 80. Goethe's " Faust " is read 
 not only in Germany but also in many other countries. 81. Thou 
 shalt not steal. 82. The door should remain closed. 83. You 
 must not exert yourself too much (fefjr). 84. People ought to love 
 their enemies but they generally do not. 85. In our town children 
 are not allowed to be outside after nine o'clock. 86. He had to 
 go home early because he had some letters to write. 87. May I 
 pick one of these flowers ? 88. My friend cannot speak German. 
 89. I do not know him, but I know where he lives. 90. She was 
 obliged to stay at home last week. 91. He does not know the 
 multiplication table. 92. That may be true, but I cannot believe 
 it. 93. The little girl said, " My papa does not like me in blue." 
 94. We are to write these sentences and bring them to class to- 
 morrow. 95. Every one ought to tell the truth. 96. That family 
 wouldn't need to endure want if it had not been extravagant. 
 
EXERCISES 131 
 
 97. Carl can't go to school to-day, he will have to stay at home. 
 
 98. I think he will be able to go to-morrow. 99. The lecture is 
 to begin at eight o'clock. 100. I should think we could read ten 
 pages a day. 101. He is said to be an excellent teacher. 102. We 
 wish to go to (in) the concert this evening. 103. Do you know 
 this book ? No, I have never read it. 104. That must be done 
 immediately. 105. He is having a new suit made. 106. I shall 
 not be at home next week. 107. He had to learn German, for 
 he lived in Berlin several years. 108. If you wish to write a let- 
 ter, I will bring you a pen and some paper. 109. 'Will you please 
 lend me your pencil ? I would do so gladly, but I wish to use it 
 myself, no. Mr. Freund is said to have gone to Florida with his 
 uncle, in. The soldiers will be permitted to go home to visit 
 their parents. 112. Mother, may I stay at home to-day? No, 
 my son, you must go to school. 113. It is better to lose one's 
 life than one's honor. 114. Two regiments marched through our 
 village this morning. 115. Do you recognize the goodness and 
 wisdom of God in nature? 116. I generally wake up at five 
 o'clock. 117. The fox called the wolf a stupid animal. 118. The 
 teacher did not have me recite to-day. 119. I think you are mis- 
 taken. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 i. Long live the king! 2. May God grant you a long and use- 
 ful life. 3. She said that she did not know it. 4. If that were 
 only true! 5. I do not believe that all he says is true. 6. They 
 asked me if you knew him. 7. He said he no longer lived in 
 Dresden. 8. That might easily be the case. 9. The teacher asked 
 the boy how old he was. 10. He looks as if he were sick. n. If 
 I had only done that yesterday ! 12. Even if the physician should 
 come, he would not be able to help. 13. Even if the physician 
 had come, he would not have been able to help. 14. I wish I were 
 at home with my mother! 15. She dresses as if she were rich. 
 16. If I had enough money, I should travel a great deal. 17. If I 
 
132 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 had had enough money, I should have paid you sooner. 18. My 
 mother would be glad to see you. 19. I have just heard that he 
 died this morning. 20. He knew of a certainty that I would not 
 disappoint him. 21. He admitted that he had not yet read the 
 book. 22. I do not know whether he is at home. 23. When I 
 asked him what time it was he replied he did not know, since he 
 did not have his watch. 24. The students would like to have two 
 weeks' vacation during the holidays, but the teachers think one 
 week is enough. 25. He spoke loud enough so that every one 
 could hear what he said. 26. Let him be silent if he cannot 
 explain what he wants. 27. I should have been allowed to go if I 
 had not been obliged to help mother. 28. He says that he should 
 have been permitted to go to New York if he had been well. 29. I 
 should like to stay longer but I must not for it is already getting 
 dark. 30. I hope she will soon be well again. 31. It vexes me to 
 think that much could have been saved if the firemen had done 
 their duty. 32. Dr. Bauer thinks that one can work best in the 
 morning. 33. The teacher asked me whether I had my book. 
 34. Daniel must be sick, for he has been absent all the week. 35. A 
 German proverb says that idleness is the beginning of all vice. 
 36. Anna says she is going to study Latin next year. 37. He 
 asked me whether I saw the palace near the cloister. 38. Let us 
 not think of (an) ourselves alone. 39. The laborer asked himself 
 what would become of his wife and children if he should die. 40. I 
 have told him nothing which could influence him. 41. These 
 pears look as if they were ripe. 42 . Had I only known that the 
 train was late! 43. We could have read another book if we had 
 wanted to. 44. If I were a European count, I should marry an 
 American heiress. 45. I had to tell him that Germany's flag is 
 red, white, and black. 
 
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 r, but, however 
 bie 2(Btet, abbey 
 adj, ah, alas 
 ber 5(ffe, ape,, monkey 
 ber 2HJ0W, maple tree 
 aU, all 
 al f when, than 
 
 art, old 
 anber, other 
 
 ber 9lnfang, beginning 
 
 anfangen, to begin 
 ber 9tyfef, apple 
 arg, bad 
 
 ftcf) argent, to be angry 
 
 arm, poor 
 
 bie SlrmBrnft, crossbow \/' 
 
 bie 5lrt, kind 
 
 bte 9lfrf)e, ashes y 
 
 ber SWffet, athlete 
 
 atmen (weak), to breathe 
 and), also 
 
 anfftefjen, to stand up 
 
 bte 9ln3lnnft, information 
 nujklt, outside 
 
 (atfen, to bake 
 
 fcalb, soon 
 ber SBattb, volume 
 ba3 ^Banb, ribbon 
 Bang, afraid 
 Batten, to build 
 
 133 
 
 ber S3anm, tree 
 
 bie 23ebingnng, condition 
 
 Betbe, both 
 
 Berften, to burst 
 
 bie SBeforgmS, care j/ 
 
 Befte^ett, to endure 
 Betett (weak), to pray 
 
 Bteten, to offer 
 Btnben, to bind 
 bie S3trtte, pear 
 
 Bitten, to beg, ask (um with ace., for) 
 
 BfetBett, to remain 
 
 Bftnb, blind 
 
 Bltttarm, as poor as a church mouse 
 
 bie Sraneret, brewery 
 Brennen, to burn 
 
 bie SBre^eJ, cracknel 
 
 Brtngen, to bring 
 
 t, bread 
 
 ty, book 
 ber S3ndjftaBe, letter 
 bie SBnrbe, burden 
 
 ber dljaffettr, light infantry soldier 
 
 ber <fjef, head, chief 
 
 ber (I)or, choir 
 
 bag Gfjor, choir (part of a church) 
 
 ber <f)rtft, Christian 
 
 bag (0ntO, account 
 
 ba, there 
 
 bag $adj, roof 
 
134 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 ber $arf)3, badger 
 
 ber $>am0tt, demon \J 
 
 bimt&er, over it, over that, about it, 
 
 about that 
 
 battmt, about it, about that 
 bettt, thy, your 
 bCttfeit, to think 
 betttt, for (conj.) 
 
 bergleirfjen, of that sort 
 
 bcrjemtJC, that one, he (who) 
 betfd&e, the same 
 
 be^gleirfjeu, of that sort 
 
 beiltfd), German 
 ber $>te&, thief 
 ber Wiener, servant 
 btefer, this, this one 
 
 bag $>utg, thing 
 
 bag $)ifttd)0tt, distich 
 bod), yet, however 
 ber ^Oltt/ cathedral 
 bag $>0rf, village 
 
 ber $)ortt, thorn 
 bort, there, yonder 
 bretetlet, three kinds of 
 
 brefrfjen, to thresh 
 
 bag irtttd, third part 
 bltmm, stupid 
 bitltfcu, to seem 
 bure^, through 
 bitfter, dark 
 
 Ct^t, genuine 
 Cbel, noble 
 bag (i, egg 
 bte (Sit^C, oak 
 CUtfarf), simple 
 Ctltmal/ once 
 ba^ (Jifctt, iron 
 bag (Slfag, Alsace 
 
 bte (tent, parents 
 eittj)fei)fett, to recommend 
 bag (Sttbe, end 
 cnbltd), finally 
 Cttteljrett, to dishonor 
 crgcbcttft, respectfully 
 
 erft, first 
 crften^, first 
 ertragen, to endure 
 Cffett, to eat 
 some 
 
 ^, some 
 eiier, your 
 curctttJiKcu, on your account 
 
 ber gfabrifattt, manufacturer 
 fasten, to drive 
 
 fatten, to fall 
 fangen, to catch 
 ferfjten, to fight 
 bie gfeber, pen 
 
 fe^lCtt (weak), to fail, lack 
 
 fein, fine 
 
 bie g-erieit (//.), vacation 
 
 ftnben, to find 
 
 ber finger, finger 
 
 flerfjteit, to braid 
 
 ftiegeit, to flow 
 bag $foff, raft V 
 fortgeljen, to leave 
 bag fjfofftt, fossil 
 
 bie JJtait, lady, woman, Mrs. 
 bag ^rauletlt, young lady, Miss 
 
 freffett, to eat 
 
 firf) freuett, to rejoice 
 bie gfreuttbttt, lady friend 
 frcuubltrf), friendly 
 bie ^reUttbftf)aft, friendship 
 
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 135 
 
 ber Sfriebe, peace 
 
 friilj, early 
 
 ber gfrityUttg, spring 
 
 fitl)(eu (weak), to feel 
 
 ber gunfe, spark 
 
 fitr, for 
 
 bag gurftCtttttttt, principality 
 
 ber gfuft, foot 
 
 ^ whole, entire 
 ber (Garten, garden 
 geben, to give 
 ber (SJebanfe, thought 
 
 gefalltg, agreeable 
 
 bag ef|alt, salary } / 
 
 gef)cn, to go 
 
 gelefjrt, learned 
 
 ber def>rte, scholar 
 
 gcfingcn, to succeed 
 
 bag Qkmarf), room (of a house) 
 
 bag Cttte, genius 
 
 geiuefcen, to enjoy 
 gent, willingly 
 ber QkfaubtC, ambassador 
 gefrfjefjen, to happen / 
 bie ^efrf|Wttift, swelling J 
 bag QkttWttb, garment 
 bag ^CWiffcn, conscience 
 glaferu, of glass 
 ber toit&e, faith 
 g(cttl). immediately 
 bag Hirf, fortune 
 graben/ to dig 
 ber raf, count 
 b, coarse 
 
 n, to have 
 e, hoe 
 
 ber ^afer, oats ' 
 5a(b, half 
 Ijafteit, to hold 
 bie Ajanb, hand 
 
 l^art, hard 
 
 ber ^aufe, heap, crowd 
 bag ^Ott^, house 
 ^attSijaftett, to keep house 
 ber $au3frf)luffei, door key 
 bag jpeim/ home 
 
 ^Clfcit, to help 
 Ijcrauf , up 
 ber $)crbft, autumn 
 r, across 
 
 ft, large 
 bie @rubc, pit 
 gut, good 
 giitig, kind 
 
 Itd)/ hearty, cordial 
 Ijettte, to-day 
 bie ^pcjc, witch 
 tyter, here 
 bie $i(fc, help 
 tytttab, down 
 
 ^inauf, up 
 
 bag ^tttbcrni^, hindrance 
 
 t)tttCtn, inside 
 
 ^ittten, behind 
 
 l)tttttber, across 
 
 bie ^>i^c, heat 
 
 l)0dj, high 
 
 ^offCtt (weak), to hope 
 
 IjbtCU (weak), to hear 
 
 bag ^of^ital, hospital 
 ber wtger, hunger 
 
 ^ttftcn, to cough 
 
 ber ut, hat 
 
 n, him 
 
136 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 tljr, her 
 
 immer, always 
 
 ber $ttf)alt, contents 
 
 tttttett, within 
 
 bag ^Itfelt, insect 
 
 bag ^tttereffe, interest 
 
 ber 3rrtltm, mistake 
 
 commentary 
 
 ber 
 
 ber ^iittig, king 
 foftcn (weak), to cost 
 frattf, ill, sick 
 
 Ira^en, to scratch 
 ber ^rteg, war 
 ber ftumpait, companion 
 Ittrj, short 
 
 i*/ yes 
 jeber, 
 
 jebtuebet, r every one 
 
 leglike*, 
 
 jcittrtltb, somebody, anybody 
 
 jetter, that one 
 
 jeijt, now 
 
 ber 3'0uriut(ift, journalist 
 
 Jung, young 
 
 ber Bungling, young man 
 
 lalt, cold 
 bie alte, cold 
 ber arpfen, carp 
 ber $afe, cheese 
 fatfjoltfrf), catholic 
 few, not a, no (adj.) 
 lettttett, to know 
 bag SHttb, child 
 
 bag Stiffen, pillow 
 
 Keitt, little 
 
 bie SHetttigfett, trifle 
 
 bag ^loftcr, monastery 
 Hug, clever 
 ber ^italic, boy 
 bag ^nic, knee 
 ber $orf), cook 
 ^ij(n, Cologne 
 ber ftomct, comet 
 
 (ad)Cn (weak), to laugh 
 bag amm/ lamb 
 (ang, long 
 laffeit, to leave 
 bag Saftcr, vice 
 laufen, to run 
 
 laufdjCU (weak), to listen 
 lebett (weak), to live 
 
 (efccnbtg, alive 
 (c^ren, to teach 
 ber Sefjrer, teacher 
 bie Setter, ladder 
 lenfen, to guide 
 lernen, to learn 
 
 lefett, to read 
 
 le#, last 
 
 bie fitefce, love 
 
 lieBen, to love 
 
 bag Steb, song 
 
 loden (weak), to praise 
 
 bag Solicit, praise 
 
 ber fior&eer, laurel 
 lo^laffen, to let loose 
 ber Sotoe, lion 
 
 m 
 
 bag $labrf)ett, girl 
 bie 9Jlagb, maid 
 ber SPiat, May 
 ber $lajor, major 
 
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 137 
 
 for my sake 
 
 matt, one, they, people 
 mattd), many a 
 
 ber Sftamt, man 
 bcifo WlttVf sea 
 mefyr, more 
 mcfjrere, several 
 meibett, to avoid 
 
 mettt, my 
 metuctiucflcit, 
 mciiiettutUcH, 
 ber 3fteifter, master 
 meffen, to measure 
 ba3 SJlettum, meter 
 mtt^, me 
 
 ttttfiglitrfett (weak), to turn out a 
 failure 
 
 mtgHitgen, ; 
 
 .J ' y to turn out a failure 
 
 mtgratett, J 
 
 tltogltcf), possible 
 motgett, to-morrow 
 ber ^Otgett, morning 
 ber 9Jhutb, mouth 
 miiffett, to be obliged to, must 
 ber 3)^it^tggattg, idleness 
 ber 9JJltt, courage 
 bie Butter, mother 
 C, myrtle 
 
 )r to, after 
 ttdef)ften3, next 
 
 Italj, near 
 
 ber Stfame, name 
 
 ber utimltdje, the same 
 
 neftmcu, to take 
 
 ttCntten, to name 
 
 nit^t, not 
 
 tttrfjtg, nothing 
 tttemnub, nobody 
 itimmer, never 
 
 ttO(^, yet, still 
 
 ber -Worben, north 
 
 bie $lot, need, distress 
 
 tttttt, now 
 
 ber 9httttitt3, nuncio 
 
 nur, only 
 
 o 
 
 ubcr/ or 
 
 ber Dfcn, stove 
 
 ber Offset, officer 
 
 liffncn (weak), to open 
 
 Uljtte, without 
 
 ber Often, east 
 
 bie Dftent (//.), Easter 
 
 pair 
 , page 
 
 , the Palatinate 
 ftrf), peach 
 (weak), to care for 
 (weak), to praise 
 
 , public 
 , desk 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 o 
 
 bie Cucflc, spring 
 
 tafctt (weak), to rave 
 bie Ofaft, rest 
 raftcn, to rest 
 ratett, to advise 
 retf|t, right 
 
 rebctt (weak), to speak 
 rebltrf), honest 
 regttett (weak), to rain 
 ber fftetdjtitm, riches 
 
138 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 bie deifje, row 
 rein, clean 
 reigen, to tear 
 reiten, to ride 
 reisen, to excite 
 rennen, to run 
 bie 9lofe, rose 
 tot, red 
 tttfctt, to call 
 bie $nf)e, rest 
 
 ber (Same, seed 
 fanft, gentle, soft 
 ber Sanger, singer 
 
 faufcit, to drink 
 
 
 ber Sdjabe, loss, harm 
 frfjaffen, to create, produce 
 flatten, to sound 
 
 bie 3rf)am, shame, modesty 
 frfjarf, sharp 
 frfjenen, to fear 
 bag djicffaf, fate 
 frfjlngen, to strike 
 
 fdjliefeen, to close 
 
 ber 9rf)(uf;, conclusion 
 ber (Scfyliiffef, key 
 fdjmctcfjdn (weak), to flatter 
 ber 3rf)micb, smith, forger 
 ber Scfjneiber, tailor 
 
 ftf)UH, beautiful 
 
 bie (Scfjonfyeit, beauty 
 
 ber Settler, pupil 
 
 frfjttwrs, black 
 fdjlDCtgen, to be silent 
 bie 8rf)U)Ct5, Switzerland 
 fattier, heavy 
 
 bag (Begcl, sail 
 fe^en, to see 
 feljr, very 
 
 fcitt, to be 
 
 fcin, his 
 
 ber 6efrctat, secretary 
 
 fcttbeu, to send 
 
 ftC, she 
 
 bag SU&er, silver 
 
 fold), such 
 
 fatten, shall 
 
 ber (Summer, summer 
 
 f unbent/ but 
 
 bie Sonne, sun 
 
 ber 3uuuertitt, sovereign 
 
 tyfit, late 
 
 ber Spatcn, spade 
 
 fJW-$ieren (weak), to take a walk 
 
 fptnncn, to spin 
 
 f gotten (weak), to deride 
 
 f^rec^en, to speak 
 
 bie S^Jroffe, round of (a ladder) 
 
 ber Staljl, steel 
 
 ftarf, strong 
 
 fteljCtt, to stand 
 
 ber (Stein, stone 
 
 ftoften, to push 
 
 ftnbieren (weak), to study 
 
 ber Stttljl, chair 
 fnd^en (weak), seek 
 ber Siiben, south 
 
 X 
 
 , day 
 
 , carpet 
 
 ber 
 
 ber 
 
 ttef, deep 
 
 ber Xift^i, table 
 
 bie Sorfjter, daughter 
 
 tot, dead 
 
 bie XtanBe, bunch of grapes 
 
 treten, to tread 
 
 tren, faithful 
 
 bie Xfii&fal, affliction ^ 
 
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 139 
 
 bie ugenb, virtue 
 
 tun, to do 
 
 bie Xiirfei, Turkey 
 
 U 
 
 iiber, over 
 
 bie Ubnng, practice 
 
 Ultt, about, around 
 
 urn ar bet ten (weak), to remodel 
 
 1Mb, and 
 
 ber Unban!/ ingratitude 
 
 nnfer, our 
 
 ttnter, under 
 
 ber $ater, father 
 toeretnigt, united 
 
 to pass away 
 , to understand 
 
 toertranen, to trust 
 
 Did, much 
 
 trierfdltig, fourfold 
 ber 2$0ge(, bird 
 
 ttJCnbett, to turn 
 
 ttenig, little 
 njcnn, if 
 mer, who 
 
 tticrbcn, to become 
 merfen, to throw 
 
 ttlCrt, worth 
 
 ber 28eften, west 
 ttltber, against 
 iweber, again 
 ber SSiUc, will 
 toinben, to wind 
 ber Winter, winter 
 
 ttliffCtt, to know 
 
 tt)0, where 
 
 UJO&Ct, at which, at what place 
 
 , by which, by what 
 r, for which, for what 
 tt)0l)f, well 
 
 ttWtnit, with which, with what 
 lumtad), according to which, accord- 
 ing to what 
 
 nioranSf out of which, out of what 
 ttJODOit, about which, about what 
 n, for which, for what 
 
 nwrfjfcn, to grow 
 
 uiarm, warm 
 
 to aw en (weak), to warn 
 
 war urn, why 
 
 toa3, what 
 
 bag SBaffer, water 
 toebett, to weave 
 ber 2Beg, way 
 
 toe!), woe 
 
 bag SBctb, woman 
 
 bie 233et3l)eit, wisdom 
 ber SSctsen, wheat 
 bie %8tlt, world 
 
 $ent0n, epigram 
 
 3 
 
 $e!jn, ten 
 
 ber 3e!jnte, tenth 
 
 bie geit, time 
 
 bie 3nflttrf|t r refuge 
 t, last 
 
 f, twice 
 5tt>etten3, secondly 
 
 L/ 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 The principal parts of nouns are given except in -weak polysyllabic feminine nouns 
 and in proper names 
 
 abandon, serlafjen 
 
 able, to be, fonnen 
 
 above, oberfyalb 
 
 absent, to be, abroefenb fein 
 
 acceptable, angenefym 
 
 according to, nac 
 
 accusative, ber 2lf!ufatit> -g -e 
 
 acquainted, to be,tennen,be!anntfein 
 
 across, iiber 
 
 act, tun, fyanbeln 
 
 admit, geftefyen 
 
 Adolph, Slbolf 
 
 advice, ber 3tat -eg *e 
 
 afraid, to be, fidj) fiirrf)ten 
 
 after, nad) 
 
 afternoon, ber -ftacfymittag -g -e 
 
 again, roieber 
 
 against, gegen 
 
 age, bag filter -g - 
 
 ago, t)or 
 
 agreeable, angene^tn 
 
 all, all, (entire) ganj; all things, al= 
 
 leg; all kinds of, allerlet; not at 
 
 all, gar nic^t 
 allowed, to be, biirfen 
 alone, allein 
 already, fd^on 
 also, aud) 
 
 altar, ber 2lltar -3 *e (-e) 
 although, obgteic^ 
 
 always, immer 
 America, Slmerifa 
 American, amerifanifdj 
 among, unter 
 and, unb 
 
 animal, bag ier -eg -e 
 Anna, 2lnna 
 another, ein anberer 
 answer, bie Slntraort 
 antiquity, bag Slltertum -g ^er 
 any, etroag ; not any, fein 
 anything, etroag; not anything, nirf)tg 
 apple, ber 2lpfel -g * 
 apple tree, ber 2(pfelbattm -g -e 
 r arm, ber 2(rm -eg -e 
 armchair, ber ef)nfeffel -g - 
 army, bie Slrmee 
 arrangement, bie inridjtung 
 arrive, anfommen 
 as, a(g ; as if, alg ob 
 ashamed, to be, ftdj fc^a'men 
 ashes, bie Slfc^e 
 ask, fragen; ask for, bitten urn 
 at, an, bet 
 aunt, bie Xante 
 autumn, ber erbft -eg -e 
 
 bad, bofe, fcf)letf)t 
 
 bake, bacfen 
 
 ball, ber Sail -eg *e 
 
 140 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 141 
 
 bank, bie 23cm! -en 
 
 barrel, bag ftafi -ffeg *ffer 
 
 basket, ber orb, -eg *e 
 
 bathe, baben 
 
 be, fein 
 
 beach, ber tranb -eg -e 
 
 beak, ber djnctbel -g JL 
 
 bean, bie 33ol)ne 
 
 beast, bag Xier -eg -e 
 
 beat, fdjlagen 
 
 beautiful, frf)bn 
 
 beauty, bie cfyontyeit 
 
 because, roeil 
 
 become, roerben 
 
 bed, bag S3ett -eg -en 
 
 before, prep. t)or ; conj. ef)e 
 
 begin, anfangen 
 
 beginning, ber Slnfancj -g *e 
 
 behind, fyinter 
 
 believe, glauben 
 
 bell, bie locfe 
 
 belong, gefyoren 
 
 below, unten 
 
 bench, bie 33an! ^e 
 
 Berlin, Berlin 
 
 Bertha, Serta 
 
 beside, neben 
 
 between, -jurifcfjen 
 
 big, gro 
 
 bird, ber SBogel -g *\ bird's nest, 
 
 bag SSogelneft -g -er 
 bite, beifjen 
 black, fd^raarg 
 Black Forest, ber 
 blame, tabeln 
 blast, jprengen 
 blue, blau 
 board, bie Xafel 
 body, ber ^orper -g - 
 book, bag SBiirf) -eg ^er 
 
 born, to be, geboren fein 
 
 both, beibe 
 
 bottle, bie giafdje 
 
 box, ber $aften -g - 
 
 boy, ber $nabe -n -n 
 
 braid, fled)ten 
 
 brave, tapfer 
 
 bravely, tapfer 
 
 bravery bie Xapferfeit 
 
 bread, bag 23rot -eg -e (*e) 
 
 break, brec^en ; break out, augbred^en 
 
 breakfast, bag gru^ftutf -g -e 
 
 bridge, bie SBrurfe 
 
 bring, bringen; bring along, mit- 
 
 bringen 
 
 broom, ber 33efen -g - 
 brother, ber Sruber -g * 
 brown, braun ; bag 33raun -g 
 brush, bie Surftc 
 bucket, ber inter -g - , 
 build, bauen 
 bump, ftofien 
 burn, brennen; burn down, nieber= 
 
 brennen 
 bury, begraben 
 
 business, bag^efd^aft-g-e, bie <Sad;e 
 but, aber, fonbern 
 butter, bie Sutter 
 buy, faufen 
 by, big, uon 
 
 cake, ber ^ucfyen -g - 
 
 call, rufen, (name) nennen; to be 
 
 called, fyeijjen 
 camp, bag Sager -g - 
 can, fonnen 
 cane, ber totf -eg ^e 
 carpet, ber Xeppid) -g -e 
 carriage, ber SBagen -g - 
 
142 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 carry, tragen 
 
 case, ber gall -eg *e 
 
 castle, bag d&Iofj -ffeg *jfer 
 
 cat, bie $ae 
 
 catch, fangen 
 
 certainty, of a, genrif; 
 
 chair, ber @tul)l -3 *e 
 
 change, fid) ctnbern 
 
 chase, Derfolgen 
 
 cheat, betriigen 
 
 cherry, bie $irfd(je 
 
 chicken, bag ul)n -g ^er 
 
 child, bag $inb -eg -er 
 
 Christopher, Gljriftopf) 
 
 church, bie $ird)e 
 
 church tower, ber $ircf)turm -g *e 
 
 city, bie tabt *e 
 
 class, bie Piaffe 
 
 clean, rein 
 
 clerk, ber Sabenbiener -g -, ber 
 
 company, bie ejellfc^aft 
 
 comparatively, 
 
 concert, bag ^onjert -g -e 
 
 contradict one's self, fidj nriber= 
 
 clever, Hug 
 
 climb, flettern 
 
 cloak, ber Mantel -s * 
 
 cloister, bag Softer -S * 
 
 close, fc^lie^en 
 
 closet, ber cfyranf -eg ^e 
 
 cloth, bag 3 eu 9 ~ e ^ ~ e 
 
 coachman, ber $utfcf)er -g - 
 
 coat, ber SHorf -eg "e 
 
 coffee, ber $affee -g 
 
 cold, fait ; bie ^dlte 
 
 collection, bie (Sammlung 
 
 colonel, ber Dberft -en -en 
 
 colorless, farblog 
 
 comb, ftimtnen ; ber ^amm -eg ^e 
 
 come, lommen; come in, l)erein= 
 
 !ommen 
 commit to memory, augraenbig 
 
 lernen 
 
 convince, iiberreben 
 
 cook, focfyen ; bie ^6cl)in 
 
 cord, bie cfynur -en (^e) 
 
 correct, uerbeffern 
 
 corrupt, cerberben 
 
 cost, foften 
 
 count, ber raf -en -en 
 
 countess, bie rtifin 
 
 country, bag Sanb -eg ^er ; to go to 
 
 the country, aufg Sanb ge^en 
 cousin, ber better -g -n 
 covered, bebecft 
 cow, bie $uf) ^e 
 crawl, friectyen 
 create, jrfjaffen 
 cry, fc^reien 
 cup, bie Xafle 
 
 daily, tdglid^ 
 
 danger, bie efatyr 
 
 dark, finfter 
 
 dative, ber 2)atit) -g -e 
 
 daughter, bie Xocfjter JL 
 
 day, ber ag -eg -e ; this day, tyeute 
 
 dead, tot 
 
 dear, teuer 
 
 death, ber 5tob -eg 
 
 debt, bie @tf)ulb -en 
 
 decide, fid) entftf)liej$en 
 
 deed, bie Xat -en 
 
 deep, tief 
 
 defeat, befiegen 
 
 depart, abreifen 
 
 diamond, ber )iamant -en -en 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 143 
 
 die, fterben 
 
 difference, ber Unterfd^ieb -eg -e 
 
 difficulty, bag ^inbernig -ffeg -ffe 
 
 diligence, ber gleif; -eg 
 
 diligent, fleijjig 
 
 disagreeable, unangeneljm 
 
 disappear, Derfdjtwnben 
 
 disappoint, taufd^en 
 
 disgrace, bie djanbe 
 
 distinctly, beutlicf) 
 
 distinguish, unterfdjeiben 
 
 disturb, ftoren 
 
 do, tun 
 
 doctor, ber Slrjt -eg *e 
 
 dog, ber unb -eg -e 
 
 doll, bie $uppe 
 
 donkey, ber (Sfel -g - 
 
 door, bie ur -en 
 
 dozen, bag 2)ufcenb -g -e 
 
 drama, bag Xrama -g -en 
 
 draw, jiefjen 
 
 dress, fid) anie(jen ; bag $leib -eg -er 
 
 drink, trinfen 
 
 drive, treiben ; to take a drive, fpa= 
 
 jieren fa^ren 
 dry, trodfen 
 duke, ber ersog -g ^e 
 during, rca^renb 
 dust, ber (Staub -g 
 duty, bie ^fltd)t -en 
 
 E 
 
 each, jeber 
 early, frii^ 
 earth, bie @rbe 
 easily, (eid^t 
 Easter, bie Dftertt 
 eat, effen, (devour) freffen 
 Edward, buarb 
 effects, bie golgen 
 
 egg, bag @i -g -er 
 eight, ad^t 
 
 either ... or, entraeber . . . ober 
 elephant, ber lefant -en -en 
 eleven hundred, elffyunbert 
 Elizabeth, (glifabct^ 
 emperor, ber $aifer -g - 
 endure, leiben 
 enemy, ber getnb -eg -e 
 England, nglanb 
 English, englifrf) 
 enough, genug 
 entire, fa'mmtlid^ 
 especially, befonberg- 
 Europe, (Suropa 
 European, ber uropaer -g - 
 even, aurf) ; even if, roenn aucf) 
 evening, ber 2lbenb -g -e; this eve- 
 ning, fjeute abenb 
 ever, je 
 
 every, jeber ; every one, ein jeber 
 everybody, jebermann 
 everything, atteg 
 everywhere, iiberall 
 exceedingly, a'ufjerft 
 excellent, rortrefflid^ 
 exercise, bie Slufgabe 
 exert one's self, fic anftrengen 
 expect, erraarten 
 expense, bie ^ed^nung 
 experience, bie (Srfa^rung 
 explain, erJIaren 
 extravagant, t)erjc^raenberifc 
 eye, bag Sluge -g -n 
 
 factory, bie gabrif 
 faith, ber laube -ng -n 
 faithful, treu 
 fall, fallen; ber erbft -eg -e 
 
144 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 family, bie gamilie 
 
 famous, beriifytnt 
 
 far, twit 
 
 farmer, ber SBauer -g (-n) -n 
 
 fast, fdjneil 
 
 father, ber SSater -g * 
 
 fault, bie <5d)ulb -en 
 
 fear, fid) fiird)ten (t)or) ; bie gurcljt 
 
 feather, bie geber 
 
 February, ber gebruar 
 
 feel, fid) fiifylen 
 
 few, toenige ; a few, einige, roenige 
 
 field, bag gelb -eg -er 
 
 fight, fed)ten,'!ampfen 
 
 find, finben 
 
 finger, ber ginger -g - 
 
 finish, t)ollenben 
 
 fire, bag geuer -g - 
 
 fireman, ber geuerroetyrmcmn -g 
 
 -leute 
 first, erft 
 
 fish, ber gifd) -eg -e 
 five, fiinf 
 flag, bie gaf)ne 
 flatter, fid) fc^meid^eln 
 flee, flie^en 
 flourish, gebeiljen 
 flow, flie^en 
 flower, bie SBlume; flower garden, 
 
 ber Slumengarten -g * 
 fly, fliegen 
 
 follow, folgen (with dat.) 
 food, bie $oft 
 foot, ber gu^ -eg ^e 
 for, prep, fiir, feit ; conj. benn 
 foreign, fremb 
 forest, ber SBalb -eg ^er 
 forget, aergeffen 
 fork, bie abel 
 former, jener 
 
 fortune, bag liicl -g 
 
 four, t)ier 
 
 fourfold, Dierfaltig 
 
 fourteen, trierjetyn 
 
 fox, ber gud^g -eg *e 
 
 Fred, gri| 
 
 Frederick the Great, griebritf) ber 
 
 French, franjofiftf) 
 Frenchman, ber grangofe -n -n 
 fresh, frifd) 
 
 friend, ber greunb -eg -e 
 frighten, erfcfyrec!en (weak trans., 
 
 strong intr.) 
 from, t)on 
 fry, braten 
 
 gain, ber enrinn -g -e 
 
 garden, ber arten -g "- 
 
 gardener, ber tirtner -g - 
 
 general, ber gelb^err -n -en 
 
 generally, geroofjnlirf) 
 
 gentleman, ber err -n -en 
 
 George, eorg 
 
 German, beutfd^ 
 
 Germany, 2)eutfd)lanb 
 
 get (become), rcerben ; get up, auf= 
 
 fte^en 
 
 girl, bag 2fta'bdl)en -g - 
 give, geben 
 glad, to be, fid) freuen 
 gladly, gern 
 glass, bag lag -eg *er 
 gloomy, triib 
 glorious, glorreid^ 
 go, ge^en ; go along, mitgefyen ; go 
 
 out, auggefyen, E)inaug ge^en 
 God, ber ott -eg ^er 
 gold, golben; bag olb -eg 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 - good, gut 
 goodness, bie iite 
 grandmother, bie roftmutter JL 
 grant, geben 
 grape, bie Xraube 
 gray, grau 
 great, grofc 
 
 green, grtin ; bag rim -eg 
 greet, grujjen, begriifjen 
 grow, raadjfen ; grow old, alt raerben 
 
 hair, bag aar -eg -e 
 
 half, fjalb ; bie fcalfte 
 
 hand, bie anb -eg "e 
 
 hang, fyangen 
 
 happen, gefrf)ef)en 
 
 na PP7> glurflirf) 
 
 harbor, ber afen -g - 
 
 hard, I) art 
 
 Harry, ^einj 
 
 hasten, eilen, firf) beeilen 
 
 hat, ber ut -eg *e 
 
 have, ^aben ; have to, miifjen 
 
 hawk, ber abicf)t -g -e 
 
 head, ber opf -eg ^e 
 
 hear, E)5ren 
 
 heart, bag ^erg -eng -en 
 
 heat, bie rifce 
 
 heaven, ber Spimmel -g - 
 
 heavy, fc^raer 
 
 heiress, bie rbin 
 
 Helen, elene 
 
 help, (jelfen 
 
 Henry, einrid^ 
 
 here, E)ier 
 
 Herman, ermann 
 
 hide, jic^ oerftetfen 
 
 high, ^od^ 
 
 hold, 
 
 holiday, ber geiertag -eg -e ; the 
 
 holidays, bie gerie-n 
 home, nad) aufe ; at home, 511 auf e 
 honest, etyrlitf) 
 honor, bie (Sfjre 
 
 hope, offen, (expect) erroarten 
 horse, bag ^Pferb -eg -e 
 hot, ei 
 
 hotel, bag otel -g -g 
 hour, bie (Stunbe ; a quarter of an 
 
 hour, eine SSiertelftunbe 
 house, bag aug -eg ^er 
 how, rate 
 
 hunting, to go, auf bie 3 a 9^ QC^en 
 hurt one's self, fid) roel) tun 
 husband, ber atte -u -n, ber 3ft ann 
 
 -eg *er 
 hut, bie Spiitte 
 
 ice, bag @ig -eg 
 idleness, ber aftiifctg 
 if, raetm 
 illness, bie 
 imagine, fid) einbilben 
 immediately, fofort, jogleid) 
 impossible, unmoglic^ 
 in, in ; in order to, um 
 increase, gunefytnen 
 induce, beraegen 
 industrious, fleifjig 
 influence, beeinfluffen 
 inheritance, bie @rbfd)aft 
 ink, bie Xinte 
 intend, beabfttf)tigen 
 interesting, interefjant 
 into, in 
 invite, einlaben 
 
146 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 January, ber 
 
 John, ^o^ann, ang 
 
 Joseph, 
 
 June, ber 
 
 Jupiter, ber 
 
 just, eben, gerabe; just as, ebenfo 
 
 K 
 
 keep, befjalten 
 key, ber <5tf)luffel -g - 
 kill, toten 
 
 kinds of, two, groeierlei 
 king, ber $omg -g -e 
 kitchen, bie $itrf)e 
 knife, bag Sfteffer -g - 
 knight, ber fitter -8 - 
 knock, flopfen 
 know, roiffen, fennen 
 
 laborer, ber Slrbeiter -g - 
 
 lady, bie 2)ame 
 
 lake, ber (See -g -n 
 
 lame, lafym 
 
 land, bag Sanb -eg -^er 
 
 language, bie prad^e 
 
 large, grof; 
 
 last, le^t ; last time, gum le^ten 3JJal 
 
 late, jpa't 
 
 Latin, bag Satetn -3 
 
 latter, biefer 
 
 laugh, lad^en (ilber) 
 
 lawyer, ber 2lbuo!at -en -en 
 
 lay, legen ; lay waste, uernwften 
 
 lazy, faul 
 
 lead pencil, ber SBleiftift -^ -e 
 
 leaf, bag Slatt -eg ^er 
 
 learn, (ernen 
 
 least, raenigft; at least, roenigfteng 
 lecture, ber SSortrag -g ^c, bie 3Sor= 
 
 lefung 
 
 leg, bag 23ein -eg -e 
 lend, leiljen 
 less, toeniger 
 lesson, bie 2lufgabe 
 letter, ber Srief -eg -e 
 lie, Uegen 
 life, bag Seben -g 
 lift, ^eben 
 like, gern (with a verb, as gern fyaben, 
 
 gern efjen) 
 
 lion, ber Soroe -n -n 
 little, (of size) Hetn, (of quantity) 
 
 roentg ; a little, ein tpenig 
 live, leben, roo^nen 
 loan, leifyen 
 
 long, long ; no longer, nidjt me^r 
 look, augfeE)en; look around, fid) 
 
 umfefyen (nad^) 
 lose, t)erlieren ; lose one's way, fidj 
 
 Dertrren 
 loud, Unit 
 Louise, Suife 
 lovable, liebengrourbig 
 love, Iteben ; ' bie Siebe 
 
 M 
 
 maid, bie Sftagb ^e 
 
 make, madden 
 
 man, ber 2J?ann -eg -^er, ber 30?enfd^ 
 
 -en -en 
 many, mel 
 march, marjd^ieren 
 Margaret, SOtogarete 
 mark, bie 3D^ar! 
 marry, fjeiraten ; to get married, fidl) 
 
 cer^eiraten 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 147 
 
 Mars, ber 3J?arg 
 
 Mary, 2ftarte 
 
 matter, bie adje 
 
 may, biirfen, mogen 
 
 meal, bag 3M)l -g 
 
 mean, meinen 
 
 measure, ntefjen 
 
 meat, bag gletfd) -eg 
 
 meet, begegneu (with dat.), treffen 
 
 meeting, bie 23erfantmlung 
 
 melt, frfjme^en 
 
 members, (of the body] bie Iteber 
 
 merchant, ber $aufmann -g -leute 
 
 merry, guteg -UJutg 
 
 metal, bag detail -g -e 
 
 Meyer, 3J2ener 
 
 milk, bie 
 
 mill, bie 
 
 miller, ber 2ftiiller -g - 
 
 mind, ber inn -eg -e; make up 
 
 one's mind, fid) entfd^Ite^en 
 mirror, ber (Spiegel -g - 
 misfortune, bag Ungliic! -g 
 mistaken, to be, ftd^ irren 
 mitten, ber anbftf)uE) -g -e 
 modest, beftfjeiben 
 Monday, ber aftontag 
 money, bag elb -eg -er 
 month, ber aftonat -g -e 
 moon, ber -JRonb -eg -e 
 morals, bie itten 
 more, tnefyr 
 morning, ber 3)2orgen -g - ; this 
 
 morning, Ijeute morgett 
 mother, bie Gutter * 
 mountain, ber 33erg -eg -e 
 mouse, bie 2ftaug ^c 
 move, giefyen (intr.}, fid^ beroegen 
 
 (trans.) 
 Mr., err 
 
 much, mel 
 
 multiplication table, bag @inma(= 
 
 eing - 
 
 music, bie aftufif 
 must, tniiffen 
 myself, jelbft 
 
 N 
 
 nail, ber 3?agel -g * 
 
 name, ber 9? ante -ng -n; to name, 
 
 nennen ; to be called, f>eif;en 
 nature, bie -ftatur 
 near, na^, bet, neben 
 need, braud^en 
 neighbor, ber 5^ad^bar -g -n 
 neither . . . nor, roeber . . . ttod) 
 nephew, ber 9teffe -n -n 
 never, nte 
 new, neu 
 New Year's Day, ber ^euja^rgtag 
 
 -eg -e 
 
 New York, 9?eut)or? (^ero 5)orf) 
 news, bie ^ac^rtd^t 
 next, nad^ft 
 niece, bie -fttcfyte 
 night, bie S^ad^t ^e 
 ninety, neunjtg 
 no, adj. fetn; adv. netn; no one, 
 
 ntemanb 
 noble, ebel 
 
 nobleman, ber belmann -g -leute 
 nonsense, ber llnftnn -g 
 north, ber -ftorben -g 
 nose, bie -ftafe 
 not, ntd^t ; not a, fetn ; not only, 
 
 ntrf)t nur; not yet, nodj ntrf)t 
 nothing, nid^tg 
 noun, bag Spaiiptroort -g ^er 
 now, jet 
 number, bie 
 
148 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 oats, ber afer -g 
 
 obedient, gefyorjam 
 
 obey, gef:)ortf)en 
 
 object, bag Dbje!t -g -e 
 
 obliged to, to be, miiffen 
 
 occur, t)orlommen 
 
 o' clock, one, ein Ufyr 
 
 of, Don 
 
 offend, beleibigen 
 
 offer, bieten 
 
 often, oft 
 
 oil, bag Dt -eg -e 
 
 old, alt 
 
 on, auf f an ; on account of, roegen 
 
 once, einmal ; at once, jofort 
 
 one, man, einer 
 
 only, nur 
 
 open, offnen, fidj offnen 
 
 operation, bie Operation 
 
 opinion, bie 9JJeinung 
 
 opposite, gegenuber 
 
 or, ober 
 
 other, anber 
 
 otherwise, fonft 
 
 ought, follen 
 
 out of, aug 
 
 outside, brauften 
 
 over, iiber 
 
 overcoat, ber llberrocf -3 "e 
 
 overcome, uberttrinben 
 
 own, eigen 
 
 page, bie ette 
 painting, bag emtilbe -g - 
 pair, bag ^aar -eg -e 
 palace, ber ^alaft -g ^e 
 paper, bag papier -g -e 
 
 parents, bie Item 
 
 Paris, ^arig 
 
 park, ber $ar! -g -e (-g) 
 
 parson, ber ^Pfarrer -g - 
 
 partake, genie^en 
 
 patient, ber patient -en -en 
 
 Paul, ^aul 
 
 pay, bejaljlen 
 
 pea, bie @rbfe 
 
 peace, ber griebe -ng 
 
 pear, bie SBirne 
 
 peasant, ber Sauer -g (-n) -n 
 
 peculiar, bejonber 
 
 pen, bie geber 
 
 pencil, ber Sleiftift -g -e 
 
 people, bie Seute 
 
 permitted, to be, burfen 
 
 physician, ber Slrjt -eg tt e 
 
 piano, bag Glacier -g -e 
 
 pick, pflitcfen 
 
 picture, bag 33ilb -eg -er 
 
 place, ftellen ; bie tette . 
 
 plant, pflanjen ; bie ^flange 
 
 plate, ber teller -g - 
 
 please, bitte 
 
 plum, bie ^pflaume 
 
 poem, bag @ebid;t -g -e 
 
 poet, ber 2)ict)ter -g - 
 
 poor, arm 
 
 potato, bie artoffel 
 
 pound, bag ^pfunb -eg -e 
 
 poverty, bie 5lrmut 
 
 powder, bag ^Suluer -g 
 
 Prague, ^rag 
 
 praise, loben 
 
 pray, beten 
 
 prefer, lieber (with a verb, as lieber 
 
 effen) 
 
 present, bag efcfyen! -g -e 
 president, ber ^rafibent -en -en 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 149 
 
 pretty, 
 
 pride, bie orf)mut 
 
 prince, ber ^rinj -en -en 
 
 professor, ber ^Srofeflor -g -en 
 
 progress, ber gortfdjrttt -g -e 
 
 proverb, bag prirfjroort -g *er 
 
 Prussia, ^reufcen 
 
 punish, beftrafen 
 
 pupil, ber <Srf)iUec -g - 
 
 put, ftellen ; put off, auffrf)ieben 
 
 quarter of an hour, eine SSiertel= 
 
 ftunbe 
 
 quickly, jtfjnell 
 quite, fefyr 
 
 R 
 
 railroad accident, bag @tfenbaljn= 
 
 unglitcf -g -gfa'Ue 
 rain, regnen ; ber ^egen -g - 
 raise, bauen 
 
 rapidity, bie c^nelligfeit 
 rarely, felten 
 rat, bie ^atte 
 read, lefen 
 ready, bereit 
 receive, befommen 
 recite, ^erfagen 
 recognize, erfennen 
 recover, genejen 
 red, rot 
 reddish, rotlic^ 
 
 regiment, bag Regiment -3 -er 
 region, bag ebiet -S -e 
 rejoice, jtrf) freuen (iiber) 
 relative, ber SSernwnbte -n -n 
 remain, bleiben 
 reply, antroorten 
 
 republic, bie 
 
 rest one's self, ftc^ augru^en 
 
 return, guriitffommen 
 
 revolve, ftc^ bretyen 
 
 reward, belo^nen 
 
 rich, reid^ 
 
 ride at full speed, fprengen 
 
 rider, ber better -g - 
 
 right, rerf)t 
 
 ring, tauten 
 
 Ring Street, bie 9ttngftrafje 
 
 ripe, reif 
 
 rise, ftetgen, (of the sun} aitfge^en 
 
 river, ber glufl -fleg 'fjc 
 
 rock, rciegen ; ber tein -eg -e 
 
 roof, bag 2)arf) -eg -"er 
 
 room, bag Qimmev -g - 
 
 rose, bie 9?ofe 
 
 run, laufen 
 
 sack, ber atf -eg *e 
 
 same, berfelbe 
 
 satisfy, befriebigen 
 
 save, retten 
 
 say, fagen 
 
 school, bie <Srf)iile 
 
 see, f efjen ; go to see, befitcfyen 
 
 seem, fc^einen 
 
 self, felbft 
 
 sell, uerfaufen 
 
 send, fdjiden, fenben 
 
 sentence, ber <3a -eg ^e 
 
 servant, ber Wiener -g - 
 
 set out, abretfen 
 
 seven, fieben 
 
 several, meljrere, eintge 
 
 shall, follen, (of futurity) roerben 
 
 sheep, bag d^af -eg -e 
 
 sheer, lauter 
 
ISO 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 shepherd, ber irt -en -en 
 
 shoe, ber d)ufy -eg -e 
 
 short, lurj 
 
 show, geigen 
 
 sick, Iran! 
 
 silent, to be, fdjroeigen 
 
 since, prep, feit; conj. ba 
 
 sing, ftngen 
 
 sink, untergefyen 
 
 sister, bie cfyroefter 
 
 sit,*fi|en; sit down, ficfy fyinfe^en 
 
 six, fecfyg 
 
 skate, d)littfd)uf) laufen 
 
 sled, ber djlitten -g - 
 
 sleep, fdjlafen; go to sleep, ein= 
 
 fd)lafen 
 small, flein 
 Smith, djtnibt 
 snow, ber djnee -g 
 so, fo 
 
 soldier, ber olbat -en -en 
 some, etroag, einige, roelcfye; some 
 
 people, manege Seute 
 somebody, jemanb 
 something, etroaS 
 son, ber (SoEjn -eS *e 
 song, ber efang -S -"c 
 soon, balb 
 sorrow, bie (Sorge 
 soup, bie (Suppe 
 sour, fauer 
 south, ber iiben - 
 spade, ber paten -3 - 
 spark, ber gunfe -n3 -n 
 sparkle, funfeln 
 speak, jprec^en 
 spend, au^geben 
 spring, ber grueling -S -e 
 stairway, bie reppe 
 stamp, bie SBriefmarfe 
 
 stand, fte^en 
 
 start, anfangen 
 
 state, ber taat -e -en 
 
 stately, ftattlid) 
 
 station, ber Sa^n^of -g ^e 
 
 stay, bleiben 
 
 steal, ftefjlen 
 
 step, treten 
 
 still, noc^ 
 
 stir, jic^ bercegen 
 
 stop, cmfOoren 
 
 storm, ber turm -eg *c 
 
 story, bie efd^tc^ie 
 
 stove, ber Dfen -g ^ 
 
 stranger, ber grembe (declined as adj.) 
 
 stream, ber trom -eg ** 
 
 street, bie trafje 
 
 strengthen, ftdrfen 
 
 string, ber gab en -g * 
 
 strong, ftar! 
 
 struggle, ber.5!ampf -eg ^t 
 
 student, ber tubent -en -en 
 
 study, ftubteren 
 
 stupid, bumm 
 
 stupidity, bie SDummtyett 
 
 succeed, gelingen (impers. with dat. 
 
 of the person) 
 success, ber (Srfolg -g -e 
 successful, erfolgreic^ 
 such, fold); such a, fold), (or fo) etn 
 suffer, letben 
 
 suit, gefaHen ; ber Slngug -g -"e 
 sum, bie umme 
 summer, ber ommer -g - 
 sun, bie onne 
 Sunday, ber omttag 
 sundown, ber onnenuntergang -g 
 surely, genrif; 
 
 surprise, bie liberrafd^ung 
 surprised, to be, fief) nwnbern 
 
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 
 
 swallow, bie 
 sweet, fiif; 
 swim, fdjnrimmen 
 Switzerland, bie <Sdjroei 
 
 table, ber Xifdj -eg -e 
 tailor, ber (Scfyneiber -g - 
 take, netymen ; take a drive, 
 
 ren fafyren ; take off, au^te^en 
 talented, begabt 
 talk, fprecfjen 
 tall, grof; 
 tea, ber Xee -g 
 teacher, ber Sefjrer -g - 
 teamster, ber gufyrmann -g -leute 
 tear, bie rane 
 tell, fagen, (relate) er^aljlen 
 ten, gefjn 
 than, alg, rate 
 thank, banfen (with ctat.) 
 the, (</<?/". 0r*.) ber, bie, bag ; (correL 
 
 adv.) the . . . the, je . . . befto 
 there, ba, e^ 
 thief, ber 2)ieb -eg -e 
 think, benten, glauben, nteinen 
 this, biefer 
 three times, breimal 
 through, burc 
 throw, raerfen 
 ticket, bie ga^r!arte, ba3 
 
 -e (-S) 
 
 time, bie 3^t 
 to-day, ^eute 
 to-morrow, morgen 
 too, aud^, gu 
 tooth, ber Qa^n -eg *c 
 top, ber tpfel - - 
 torn, jerriflen 
 town, bie labt -e 
 
 train, 
 
 translate, iiberfe^en 
 
 travel, reifen 
 
 tree, ber Saum -eg K 
 
 trip, bie Dieije 
 
 trouble, bie 
 
 true, raa^r 
 
 trust, trauen (with dat) 
 
 truth, bie SSa^r^eit 
 
 tub, ber 3uber -g - 
 
 turnip, bie ^iifce 
 
 twelve, jraolf 
 
 twenty-four, trierimbatDanjig 
 
 two, jraei ; two kinds of, groeterlei 
 
 U 
 
 umbrella, ber ^egenfcfyirm -g -e 
 uncle, ber Dnfel -g - 
 under, unter 
 understand, Derfte^en 
 undertake, unternetymen 
 university, bie llnit)erfitat 
 until, big 
 use, gebraucfyen 
 useful, nii^Iid^ 
 usually, geroofynltdj 
 
 vacation, bie gerien (//.) 
 valley, bag Xal -eg *er 
 vegetables, bag emiife -g 
 verb, bag Qeitroort -g "er 
 very, fefyr ; very much, fetyr 
 vex, argern 
 vice, bag Safter -g - 
 victory, ber @ieg -eg -e 
 village, bag >orf -eg *er 
 vinegar, ber @ffig -g 
 violently, f)eftig 
 visit, befud^en 
 
152 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 W 
 
 wagon, ber SBagen -g - 
 
 wake up, cwfroadjen 
 
 wall, bie SBanb *e 
 
 want, rooUen; bie -ftot 
 
 warm, roarm 
 
 wash, nwjdjen 
 
 waste, Derfdjroenben ; lay waste, t)er= 
 
 roitften 
 
 watch, bie llfjr -en 
 water, (horses) trdnfen, (plants) be= 
 
 giefeen; bag Staffer -g - 
 weak, frf)tt)adj 
 wear, tragen 
 week, bie 2Bod)e 
 weigh, ttriegen 
 welcome, tt)ill?ommen 
 well, gefunb, gut, roofyl; bev 33run= 
 
 n en -3 - 
 
 well-formed, roofylgebilbet 
 whale, ber SBalfijrf) -cS -e 
 what, roa3, raeld^er ; what kind of, 
 
 ttmS fiir ein 
 
 when, raann, raenn, al^ 
 where, n)0 
 wherever, TOO immer 
 whether, ob 
 which, roeldjer 
 while, rad^renb 
 white, raeif; 
 whoever, n)er 
 why, raarum 
 
 widow, bie SBitroe 
 
 wife, bie grau -en 
 
 will, rcollen, (of futurity) toerben 
 
 William II, SBt^elm II. 
 
 wind, ber SBinb -e -e 
 
 window, bag genfter -S - 
 
 wine, ber SBein -eg -e 
 
 winter, ber SBtnter -g - 
 
 wisdom, bie 
 
 wise, flug 
 
 wish, roollen, 
 
 with, mit 
 
 without, ofjne 
 
 wolf, ber 23BoIf -eg *e 
 
 woman, bie ^$\,&\\, -en 
 
 word bag SBort -eg ^er 
 
 work, arbetten; bie 2lrbett, bag 
 
 2Berf -eg -e 
 
 workman, ber Slrbeiter -g - 
 world, bie 9Bett -en 
 worth, ber SBert -g 
 wound, bie SBunbe 
 write, fdjretben 
 
 yard, ber of -eg *e 
 year, bag Sa^r -eg -e 
 yellow, gelb 
 yes, ja 
 
 yesterday, geftern 
 yet, bocf), nod) 
 young, jung 
 
INDEX 
 
 The references are to sections of the text. 
 
 aber, 177 
 
 accent, 12 
 
 adjectives, 75-109: 
 
 comparison of, 98-109 ; declen- 
 sion of, 84-86, 108 ; demonstrative, 
 91-96; indefinite numeral, 90; in- 
 terrogative, 97; limiting, 75; par- 
 ticipial, 87; possessive, 32, 89; 
 proper, 88 ; qualifying, 75 ; table 
 of endings, 81 ; used as nouns, 86 ; 
 vowel mutation in, 109 
 
 adverbs, 110-116 
 
 all, 90, note 5 
 
 alphabet, 1 
 
 al3, 31, 103, 183, 185 
 
 ate ob, 285, 4 
 
 am form of the superlative, 106, 2 ; 
 111 
 
 article, 25-32, 173 : 
 
 definite, 25~29, 173; indefinite, 
 30-32 
 
 aufftefyen, 247 
 
 bringen, 230 
 
 capitals, 23 
 conjunctions, 174-186: 
 
 coordinate, 174-180; subordinate, 
 
 181-186 
 
 consonant combinations, 4 
 
 ba + preposition, 128 
 biefer, 91 
 
 diphthongs, 3, 9 
 
 bu, 131 
 bun!en, 230 
 burfen, 271 
 
 etn paar, 90, i a 
 ein roenig, 90, 2 a 
 eitel, 90, 3 a 
 eg gibt, 279, 5 
 
 former, 158 
 
 ganj, 90, note 4 
 gefjen, 236 
 gender, 70~74 
 genug, 90, 3 a 
 gerundive, 202 
 griifjen, 229 
 
 Ejaben, 206, 207, 222 
 b, 90, note 4 
 226 
 
 rjorf), 99 
 
 tf)r, 89, 123, 131, 136, 138, note 
 imperative, 234-237, 240-244 
 
 impersonal verbs, 279 
 indefinite pronouns, 161-163 
 indicative, present, of strong verbs, 
 
 232-238 
 
 indirect discourse, 286-289 
 infinitive, 198, 199, 274 
 
 '53 
 
154 
 
 HANDBOOK OF GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 interjections, 187 
 
 interrogative pronouns, 141-143 
 
 jeber, 162 
 jemcmb, 161 
 
 feitt, 30, 162 
 fennen, 230 
 fonnen, 271 
 
 lafjen -f- infinitive, 276 
 latter, 158 
 Icwter, 90, 3 a 
 ioben, 224 
 
 man, 161, 266, i 
 
 manrf), 90, note i 
 
 mefyr, 90, 3 a 
 
 mefyrer-, 90, note 2 
 
 mein, 89 
 
 metner, 136, 137 
 
 modal auxiliaries, 267-278 
 
 mood, 280 
 
 mutated vowels, 2 
 
 mutation, in adjectives, 109 ; in 
 
 nouns, 35, 39, 46, 51, 54, 55 ; in 
 
 verbs, 233, 244 
 
 naf), 99 
 
 md)t, 308 
 
 nid)t3, 161 
 
 nouns, 33-74 : 
 
 declension of, 33-61 ; class I, 
 strong, 44-48; class II, strong, 
 49-51; class III, strong, 52-54; 
 mixed, 59~61 ; weak, 56~58 ; with 
 borrowed plurals, 65 ; differentia- 
 tion of, 66 ; list of, 322-339 ; mono- 
 syllabic, 322-326, 333-336 ; poly- 
 syllabic, 327-332 ; with mutation, 
 
 322-332 ; without mutation, 333- 
 339 ; of weight, 62, 63 ; proper, 
 67-69 
 numerals, 117-122 
 
 order of words, 290-310 : 
 
 inverted, 293 ; normal, 292 ; trans- 
 posed, 294 
 
 participles, 87, 201, 203, 275 
 
 passive voice, 260-266 
 
 prefixes, 250-252 
 
 prepositions, 164-173 
 
 principal parts of nouns, 34 ; of 
 verbs, 197 
 
 pronouns, 123-163 : 
 
 demonstrative, 152-160 ; indef- 
 inite, 161-163 ; interrogative, 141- 
 143; personal, 123-131; posses- 
 sive, 136-140; reflexive, 132-135, 
 254, 255 ; relative, 144-151 
 
 pronunciation, 6~13 
 
 reben, 229 
 rubern, 226 
 
 fdjlagen, 231 
 
 fefjen, 235, 241 
 
 jein, 208, 209, 221, 276 
 
 felber, felbft, 133 
 
 fid) fcfylagen, 258 
 
 fi$ umfeljen, 259 
 
 fie, 123 
 
 @te, 123, 131 
 
 fold), 96, 156 
 
 fonbern, 178 
 
 jtefjen, 236 
 
 subjunctive, 280-289; vowel of 
 present, 205; vowel of imper- 
 fect, 245 
 
INDEX 
 
 I5S 
 
 superlative, 104-108, 111-116 
 
 syllables, division into, 14-22 
 
 tenses, formation of, 211-220 
 unreal conditions, 285, 3 
 
 verbs, 189-298 : 
 
 auxiliary, 190 ; conjugation of, 
 221-265 ; differentiation of, 320, 
 321 ; endings of, 225 ; impersonal, 
 279; in eln, ern, 226; in ieren, 
 eien, 203 ; inseparable, 248, 249 ; 
 irregular weak, 230 ; list of strong, 
 319; modal auxiliary, 267-278; 
 present indicative of, 232-238; 
 present subjunctive of, 204, 205 ; 
 reflexive, 253-259 ; separable, 
 246, 259 ; stem of, 200 ; strong, 
 231-245; strong verbs with a, 
 232, 233; strong verbs with e, 
 232, 234-236 ; weak, 224-230 
 
 n, 249 
 triel, 90, 3 c 
 
 voice, 196 ; passive, 260-266 
 vowels, 6-9, 39, 205, 232-238, 311 : 
 
 gradation of, 311-318 ; in present 
 indicative, 232-238; in present 
 subjunctive, 205 ; in imperfect 
 subjunctive, 245 ; mutation of, 
 39, 46, 51, 54, 55 ; pronunciation 
 of, 6-9 
 
 rocmn, 183, 184 
 
 nmS, 141-144, 148, 161, note 
 
 wa% fur ein, 97, 141 
 
 weight, nouns of, 62, 63 
 
 roenig, 90, 3 c 
 
 roenn, 183, 186 
 
 roer, 141, 142, 144, 147, 163 
 
 roerben, 223 
 
 roifjen, 271 
 
 WO + preposition, 143, 146 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 IN STACKS 
 
 SEP 2 9 1960 
 
 UM I'JM 
 
 LD 21A-50w-4,'60 
 (A9562slO)476B 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
YB 01339 
 
 926647 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY